g-class - mercedes-benz usawelcometotheworldofmercedes-benz weurgeyoutoreadthisoperator'smanual...

G-ClassOperator's Manual

Order no. P4630121 13 Part no. 463 584 39 04 Edition A 2017

É4635843904}ËÍ4635843904

G-Clas

sOperat

or'sM

anual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and about Daimler AG can be found on thefollowing websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)

Editorial office

Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated orotherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-out written permission from Daimler AG.

Vehicle manufacturer

Daimler AGMercedesstra e 13770327 StuttgartGermany

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-tooth SIG Inc.RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg-istered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John-son Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarksof Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of HarmanInternational Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-cle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates aninstruction that must be fol-lowed.

X Several of these symbols insuccession indicate an

instruction with severalsteps.

(Ypage)

This symbol tells you whereyou can find more informa-tion about a topic.

YY This symbol indicates awarning or an instructionthat is continued on the nextpage.

Dis‐play This text indicates a mes-sage on the multifunctiondisplay/multimedia display.

As at 29.02.2016

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-cle before driving. For your own safety and alonger vehicle life, follow the instructions andwarning notices in this Operator's Manual.Ignoring them could result in damage to thevehicle or personal injury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RModelROrderRCountry specificationRAvailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right tointroduce changes in the following areas:RDesignREquipmentRTechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:RDigital Operator's ManualRPrinted Operator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep these documents in the vehicle at alltimes. If you sell the vehicle, always pass alldocuments on to the new owner.Your Operator's Manual:

Digital form inside the vehicleThe Digital Operator's Manual providescomprehensive and specifically adaptedinformation on your vehicle's equipmentand multimedia system. It contains infor-mative animations, individual languagesettings and an intuitive search function.Booklet inside the vehicleIn addition to this manual and the afore-mentioned digital media, you also have theoption to obtain a comprehensive printedversion of the Supplement for your multi-media system from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Digital form via the InternetTheOperator'sManual on the Internet pro-vides easy access to all informationregarding your vehicle andmultimedia sys-tem. It also provides helpful animations,interesting background information and awide array of search options.Digital form as an AppUsing the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, youcan view all the information on your vehicleandmultimedia system via mobile Internetor download it independently of networkaccess. Available for smartphones or tab-lets.

Please note that theMercedes-Benz Guides Appmay not yet be available in your country.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

4635843904 É4635843904}ËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Digital Operator's Manual .................. 22Introduction ........................................... 22Operation ............................................... 22

Introduction ......................................... 23Protecting the environment ................... 23Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ............... 23Operator's Manual ................................. 24Service and vehicle operation ................ 24Operating safety .................................... 26QR codes for rescue cards .................... 28Data stored in the vehicle ...................... 28Information on copyright ....................... 29

At a glance ........................................... 31Cockpit .................................................. 31Instrument cluster ................................. 32Multifunction steering wheel ................. 33Center console ...................................... 34Overhead control panel ......................... 36Door control panel ................................. 37

Safety ................................................... 38Occupant safety .................................... 38Children in the vehicle ........................... 49Pets in the vehicle ................................. 57Driving safety systems ........................... 57Protection against theft ......................... 61

Opening and closing ........................... 63SmartKey ............................................... 63Doors ..................................................... 66Rear door ............................................... 68Side windows ......................................... 69Sliding sunroof ....................................... 71

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 74Correct driver's seat position ................ 74Seats ..................................................... 74Steering wheel ....................................... 79Mirrors ................................................... 81Memory functions .................................. 83

Lights and windshield wipers ............ 85Exterior lighting ..................................... 85Interior lighting ...................................... 88Replacing bulbs ..................................... 88Windshield wipers .................................. 92

Climate control .................................... 95Overview of the climate control sys-tem ........................................................ 95Operating the climate control system .... 97Air vents .............................................. 101

Driving and parking .......................... 103Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle ..... 103Driving ................................................. 103Adjustable damping ............................. 109Automatic transmission ....................... 109Refueling ............................................. 118Parking ................................................ 120Driving tips .......................................... 122Driving systems ................................... 131Off-road driving systems ...................... 145Towing a trailer .................................... 149

On-board computer and displays .... 157Important safety notes ........................ 157Displays and operation ........................ 157Menus and submenus ......................... 159Display messages ............................... 169Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................... 187

Multimedia system ........................... 198General notes ...................................... 198Important safety notes ........................ 198Function restrictions ............................ 198Operating system ................................ 199

Stowage and features ...................... 204Loading guidelines ............................... 204Stowage areas ..................................... 205Features .............................................. 210

2 Contents

Maintenance and care ...................... 225Engine compartment ........................... 225Maintenance ........................................ 230Care ..................................................... 231

Breakdown assistance ..................... 238Where will I find...? .............................. 238Flat tire ................................................ 240Battery (vehicle) .................................. 241Jump-starting ....................................... 243Towing and tow-starting ...................... 246Fuses ................................................... 248

Wheels and tires ............................... 251Important safety notes ........................ 251Operation ............................................ 251Winter operation .................................. 252Tire pressure ....................................... 254Loading the vehicle .............................. 260All about wheels and tires ................... 263Changing a wheel ................................ 269Wheel and tire combinations ............... 273

Technical data ................................... 274Information regarding technical data ... 274Vehicle electronics .............................. 274Identification plates ............................. 275Service products and filling capaci-ties ...................................................... 276Vehicle data ......................................... 281Vehicle data for off-road driving .......... 283Trailer tow hitch ................................... 284

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-tion System)

12 V socketsee Socket (12 V)

115 V socket ...................................... 213

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 171Function/notes ................................ 57Warning lamp ........................ 190, 191

AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 49

Activating media modeGeneral notes ................................ 203

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 61Additives (engine oil) ........................ 279Address book

see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198

Adjustable damping .......................... 109Adjusting the volume

COMAND ....................................... 199Air bags

Deployment ..................................... 46Display message ............................ 175Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 45Important safety notes .................... 43Introduction ..................................... 43PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-tor lamp ........................................... 39Pelvis air bag ................................... 45Side impact air bag .......................... 45Window curtain air bag .................... 46

Air ventsImportant safety notes .................. 101Rear ............................................... 102Setting ........................................... 101Setting the center air vents ........... 102Setting the side air vents ............... 102

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AlarmATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 61Switching off (ATA) .......................... 61Switching the function on/off(ATA) ................................................ 61

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

All-wheel driveTransfer case ................................. 145

AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 167Anti-theft alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Approach/departure angle .............. 130Ashtray ............................................... 211Assistance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 164Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 164ASSYST service interval display

Service messages .......................... 230ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Activating/deactivating ................... 61Function ........................................... 61Switching off the alarm .................... 61

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 176see Lights

Automatic car wash (care) ............... 231Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 107Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 106Automatic headlamp mode ................ 86Automatic transmission

Display message ............................ 186Drive position (ECO start/stopfunction) ........................................ 111Drive program ................................ 114Driving tips .................................... 112Emergency running mode .............. 117Engaging drive position .................. 111Engaging neutral ............................ 111Engaging reverse gear ................... 110Engaging the park position ............ 110Important safety notes .................. 109

4 Index

Kickdown ....................................... 112Manual shifting .............................. 115Neutral (ECO start/stop func-tion) ............................................... 111Overview ........................................ 109Problem (malfunction) ................... 117Program selector button ................ 113Pulling away ................................... 105Selector lever ................................ 110Shift ranges ................................... 114Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 114Trailer towing ................................. 113Transmission position display ........ 110

Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 117Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-ing) ...................................................... 284

BBabySmart™

Air bag deactivation system ............. 53Back button ....................................... 199Backup lamp

Replacing bulbs ............................... 91Ball coupling

Installing ........................................ 152BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 58Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 65Important safety notes .................... 64Replacing ......................................... 65

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 243Display message ............................ 178Important safety notes .................. 241Jump starting ................................. 243Overview ........................................ 241

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 164Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 164Display message ............................ 181Notes/function .............................. 137

Blootooth®Connecting a different mobilephone ............................................ 203

Bluetooth®Searching for a mobile phone ........ 202see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198Telephony ...................................... 201

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 173Notes ............................................. 279

Brake fluid level ................................ 230Brake force distribution

see EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Brake lampReplacing bulbs ............................... 91

Brake lampsDisplay message ............................ 176

BrakesABS .................................................. 57BAS .................................................. 58Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 279Display message ............................ 171EBD .................................................. 61High-performance brake system .... 125HOLD function ............................... 139Important safety notes .................. 123Maintenance .................................. 124Parking brake ................................ 121Riding tips ...................................... 123Warning lamp ................................. 189

Breakdownsee Flat tiresee Towing away

Brightness control (instrumentcluster lighting) ................................... 32Brush guard ....................................... 221Bulbs

Backup lamp .................................... 89Brake lamp ...................................... 89Rear fog lamp .................................. 89Standing lamps (front) ..................... 89Standing lamps (rear) ...................... 89Tail lamp .......................................... 89Turn signal lamp (front) .................... 89Turn signal lamp (rear) ..................... 89see Replacing bulbs

Index 5

CCalifornia

Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 24

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Camerasee Rear view camera

CareCar wash ........................................ 231Carpets .......................................... 237Chrome parts ................................. 235Display ........................................... 236Exhaust pipe .................................. 235Exterior lights ................................ 234General notes ................................ 231Interior ........................................... 236Matte finish ................................... 233Paint .............................................. 233Plastic trim .................................... 236Power washer ................................ 232Rear view camera .......................... 235Roof lining ...................................... 237Seat belt ........................................ 237Seat cover ..................................... 236Selector lever ................................ 236Sensors ......................................... 234Steering wheel ............................... 236Trim pieces .................................... 236Washing by hand ........................... 232Wheels ........................................... 233Windows ........................................ 234Wiper blades .................................. 234Wooden trim .................................. 236

Cargo compartment coverImportant safety notes .................. 209Installing/removing ....................... 209Notes/how to use ......................... 209Opening and closing ...................... 209

Cargo compartment enlargementImportant safety notes .................. 206

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 209CD


CD player/CD changer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 162

Center consoleLower section .................................. 35Overview .......................................... 34Upper section .................................. 34

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 166Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 63

Change of address .............................. 25Change of ownership .......................... 25Changing bulbs

Standing lamp (rear) ........................ 91Changing gears .................................. 112Child

Restraint system .............................. 50Child seat

BabySmart™ air bag deactivationsystem ............................................. 53Forward-facing restraint system ...... 55LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 51On the front-passenger seat ............ 54Problem (malfunction) ..................... 55Rearward-facing restraint system .... 54Top Tether ....................................... 52

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 56Rear doors ....................................... 56

ChildrenSpecial seat belt retractor ............... 50

Children in the vehicleImportant safety notes .................... 49

Chrome parts (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 235Cigarette lighter ................................ 212Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 234Trailer tow hitch ............................. 235

Climate controlControlling automatically ................. 98Cooling with air dehumidification ..... 97Defrosting the windows ................... 99Defrosting the windshield ................ 99Dual-zone automatic climate con-trol ................................................... 95ECO start/stop function .................. 97Important safety notes .................... 95

6 Index

Indicator lamp .................................. 97Maximum cooling ............................. 99Notes on using dual-zone auto-matic climate control ....................... 96Overview of systems ........................ 95Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 100Problems with "cooling with airdehumidification" ............................. 97Refrigerant ..................................... 280Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 281Setting the air distribution ............... 98Setting the air vents ...................... 101Setting the airflow ........................... 98Setting the temperature .................. 98Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 101Switching on/off .............................. 97Switching residual heat on/off ...... 101Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 100Switching the ZONE functionon/off .............................................. 99Windshield defroster ........................ 99

CockpitOverview .......................................... 31

COMANDSwitching on/off ........................... 199see separate operating instructions

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 236

Combination switch ............................ 87Connecting a USB device


Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 160Controller ........................................... 199Controlling speed

see DISTRONIC PLUSConvenience closing feature .............. 70Convenience opening feature ............ 70Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 229Display message ............................ 176Filling capacity ............................... 280Notes ............................................. 279

Temperature (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 167Temperature gauge ........................ 158Warning lamp ................................. 194

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 29Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 131Deactivating ................................... 132Driving system ............................... 131Function/notes ............................. 131General notes ................................ 131Important safety notes .................. 131Resuming the stored speed ........... 132Setting a speed .............................. 132Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 131

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 210Important safety notes .................. 210Rear compartment ......................... 210

DData

see Technical dataDaytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 176Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 165Switching on/off (switch) ................ 85

Delayed switch-offExterior lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 165Interior lighting .............................. 166

Diagnostics connection ...................... 27Differential locks

Disengaging ................................... 149Engaging ........................................ 148Front axle ...................................... 149General notes ................................ 147Rear axle ........................................ 149Terrain ........................................... 147Transfer case ................................. 149

Digital Operator's ManualHelp ................................................. 22Introduction ..................................... 22

Index 7

Digital speedometer ......................... 160Display messages

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 170Driving systems ............................. 179Engine ............................................ 176General notes ................................ 169Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 170Lights ............................................. 176Safety systems .............................. 171Service interval display .................. 230SmartKey ....................................... 187Tires ............................................... 183Vehicle ........................................... 186

Distance recordersee Odometersee Trip odometer

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 196DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating ....................................... 134Activation conditions ..................... 134Cruise control lever ....................... 134Deactivating ................................... 136Display message ............................ 181Driving tips .................................... 136Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS ....... 135Function/notes ............................. 132Important safety notes .................. 133Stopping ........................................ 135Warning lamp ................................. 196

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 166Automatic locking (switch) ............... 67Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 63Control panel ................................... 37Display message ............................ 186Emergency locking ........................... 68Emergency unlocking ....................... 68Important safety notes .................... 66Opening (from inside) ...................... 67Overview .......................................... 66

Drinking and driving ......................... 123Drive program

Automatic transmission ................. 114Display ........................................... 110SETUP (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 168

Driver's doorsee Doors

Driving downhill ................................ 130Driving in mountainous terrain

Approach/departure angle ............ 130Driving downhill ............................. 130Gradient-climbing capability(maximum) ..................................... 130

Driving lampssee Daytime running lamps

Driving off-roadDriving downhill ............................. 130see Off-road driving

Driving on flooded roads .................. 125Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 57ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 61BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 58EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution) ............................................. 61ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 58Important safety information ........... 57Overview .......................................... 57

Driving systemsBlind Spot Assist ............................ 137Cruise control ................................ 131Display message ............................ 179DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 132HOLD function ............................... 139PARKTRONIC ................................. 140Rear view camera .......................... 143

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 112Brakes ........................................... 123Break-in period .............................. 103DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 136Downhill gradient ........................... 123Drinking and driving ....................... 123Driving in winter ............................. 126Driving on flooded roads ................ 125Driving on sand .............................. 129Driving on wet roads ...................... 125Driving over obstacles ................... 129Exhaust check ............................... 123Fuel ................................................ 122General .......................................... 122Gravel roads .................................. 129

8 Index

Hydroplaning ................................. 125Icy road surfaces ........................... 126Important safety notes .................. 103Limited braking efficiency on sal-ted roads ....................................... 124Off-road driving .............................. 127Off-road fording ............................. 126Pulling away on slippery surfaces .. 125Snow chains .................................. 253Subjecting brakes to a load ........... 124The first 1500 km .......................... 103Tire ruts ......................................... 129Towing a trailer .............................. 151Traveling uphill ............................... 130Wet road surface ........................... 124

DVD audioOperating (on-board computer) ..... 162

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 162see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 166Function/notes ................................ 80

EASY-EXIT featureFunction/notes ................................ 80Switching on/off ........................... 166

EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)

Display message ............................ 172Function/notes ................................ 61

ECO start/stop functionDeactivating/activating ................. 106General information ....................... 106

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 49

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 68Vehicle ............................................. 68

Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 46

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 24

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 194Display message ............................ 176ECO start/stop function ................ 106Engine number ............................... 276Irregular running ............................ 108Jump-starting ................................. 243Starting problems .......................... 108Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 105Switching off .................................. 121Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 248

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 108

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 228Additives ........................................ 279Checking the oil level ..................... 227Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 227Checking the oil level using theon-board computer ........................ 227Display message ............................ 178Filling capacity ............................... 279General notes ................................ 278Notes about oil grades ................... 278Notes on oil level/consumption .... 227Temperature (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 167

Entering an addresssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198

ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 168Characteristics ................................. 59Deactivating/activating ................... 59Display message ............................ 171Function/notes ................................ 58General notes .................................. 58Important safety information ........... 59Trailer stabilization ........................... 60Warning lamp ................................. 191

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ...................................................... 59

Index 9

Exhaustsee Exhaust pipe

Exhaust check ................................... 123Exhaust pipe

Cleaning ......................................... 235Exterior lighting

Cleaning ......................................... 234see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ......................................... 81Dipping (automatic) ......................... 83Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 167Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 82Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 82Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 82Setting ............................................. 82Storing settings (memory func-tion) ................................................. 83Storing the parking position ............. 83

FFavorites

Overview ........................................ 200Filler cap

see RefuelingFirst-aid kit ......................................... 238Flat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting thespare wheel ................................... 269Preparing the vehicle ..................... 240

Folding the seat backrest (rear)forwards/back .................................. 207Frequencies

Mobile phone ................................. 274Two-way radio ................................ 274

FuelAdditives ........................................ 278Consumption statistics .................. 160Displaying the range ...................... 160Driving tips .................................... 122Fuel gauge ....................................... 32Grade (gasoline) ............................ 277Important safety notes .................. 277Premium-grade unleaded gaso-line ................................................. 277Problem (malfunction) ................... 120

Refueling ........................................ 118Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 277

Fuel filler flapClosing ........................................... 119Emergency release ........................ 119Opening ......................................... 119

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 160

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 277Problem (malfunction) ................... 120

Fuse allocation chart ........................ 249Fuse box

cargo compartment ....................... 250Dashboard ..................................... 249Front-passenger footwell ............... 249Transmission tunnel ....................... 250

FusesAllocation chart ............................. 249Before changing ............................. 249Dashboard fuse box ....................... 249Fuse allocation chart ..................... 249Fuse box in the cargo compart-ment .............................................. 250Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell .......................................... 249Fuse box in the transmission tun-nel ................................................. 250Important safety notes .................. 248

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 224General notes ................................ 221Important safety notes .................. 222Opening/closing the garage door .. 224Problems when programming ........ 224Programming the remote control ... 222Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 223

Gasoline ............................................. 277Gear indicator (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 167Genuine parts ...................................... 23Glove box ........................................... 205

10 Index

Google™ Local Searchsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198

GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defini-tion) .................................................... 268

HHazard warning lamps ........................ 87Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 76Adjusting (rear) ................................ 77Installing/removing (rear) ................ 77Luxury .............................................. 76Resetting (front) ............................... 76see NECK-PRO head restraintssee NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

HeadlampsCleaning system (function) .............. 86Cleaning system (notes) ................ 280Fogging up ....................................... 87Protective grille ................................ 90see Automatic headlamp mode

Heatingsee Climate control

High beam flasher ............................... 87High-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 176Switching on/off .............................. 87

HOLD functionActivating ....................................... 139Activation conditions ..................... 139Deactivating ................................... 139Function/notes ............................. 139General notes ................................ 139

Home addresssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198

HoodClosing ........................................... 226Display message ............................ 186Important safety notes .................. 225Opening ......................................... 225

Horn ...................................................... 31Hydroplaning ..................................... 125

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 61Indicator lamp

Replacing bulbs (rear) ...................... 91Insect protection on the radiator .... 226Instrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 32Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 157Interior lighting

Automatic control ............................ 88Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 166Overview .......................................... 88

iPod®see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198

JJack

Pump lever ..................................... 270Storage location ............................ 238Using ............................................. 270

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 243

KKey positions

SmartKey ....................................... 104

LLap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 168LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 51License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 176Light sensor (display message) ....... 176Lights

Activating/deactivating the inte-rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 166Automatic headlamp mode .............. 86Combination switch ......................... 87Fogged up headlamps ...................... 87General notes .................................. 85

Index 11

Hazard warning lamps ..................... 87High beam flasher ............................ 87High-beam headlamps ..................... 87Light switch ..................................... 85Low-beam headlamps ...................... 85Parking lamps .................................. 86Rear fog lamp .................................. 86Standing lamps ................................ 86Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 165Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (switch) ...................... 85Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 165Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 165Turn signals ..................................... 87see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs

Load anchorage ................................. 208Loading guidelines ............................ 204Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 67Emergency locking ........................... 68From inside (central locking but-ton) .................................................. 67

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 166LOW RANGE off-road gear ................ 146Low-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 176Switching on/off .............................. 85

Lumbar supportAdjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port .................................................. 78

Luxury head restraints ....................... 76

MM+S tires ............................................ 253Malfunction message

see Display messages

Matte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 233mbrace

Call priority .................................... 218Display message ............................ 173Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 218Downloading routes ....................... 221Emergency call .............................. 215General notes ................................ 214Geo fencing ................................... 221Info call button .............................. 217Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 220Remote fault diagnosis .................. 220Remote vehicle locking .................. 219Roadside assistance button ........... 216Search & Send ............................... 218Self-test ......................................... 215Speed alert .................................... 221System .......................................... 215Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 221Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 219

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 64General notes .................................. 64Inserting .......................................... 64Locking vehicle ................................ 68Removing ......................................... 64Unlocking the driver's door .............. 68

Memory card (audio) ......................... 162Memory function ................................. 83Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive

DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 132Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 170Messages

see Display messagesMirror turn signal

Cleaning ......................................... 234Mirrors

Sun visor ........................................ 211see Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirror

Mobile phoneConnecting (Bluetooth® inter-face) .............................................. 201

12 Index

Connecting another mobilephone ............................................ 203Frequencies ................................... 274Installation ..................................... 274Menu (on-board computer) ............ 163Transmission output (maximum) .... 274

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 64Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 272Mounting a new wheel ................... 272Preparing the vehicle ..................... 270Raising the vehicle ......................... 270Removing a wheel .......................... 272Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 270

MP3Operation ....................................... 162see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198see separate operating instructions

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 159Permanent display ......................... 165

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer .. 158Overview .......................................... 33

Music filessee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198

NNavigation

Entering a destination .................... 200Menu (on-board computer) ............ 161see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198see separate operating instructions

NECK-PRO head restraintsOperation ......................................... 48Resetting triggered .......................... 48

NECK-PRO luxury head restraintsImportant safety notes .................... 48Operation ......................................... 48Resetting when triggered ................. 49

Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 103

OOccupant safety

Air bags ........................................... 43Automaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 49BabySmart™ air bag deactivationsystem ............................................. 53Children in the vehicle ..................... 49Important safety notes .................... 38Introduction to the restraint sys-tem .................................................. 38PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 39Pets in the vehicle ........................... 57Restraint system warning lamp ........ 38Seat belt .......................................... 39

Odometer ........................................... 160Off-road

Differential locks ............................ 147Off-road ABS .................................... 58

Off-road drivingChecklist after driving off-road ...... 129Checklist before driving off-road .... 128Driving on sand .............................. 129General information ....................... 127Important safety notes .................. 127Traveling uphill ............................... 130

Off-road fording ................................. 126Off-road system

Permanent all-wheel drive ............. 139Oil

see Engine oilOn-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 167Assistance menu ........................... 164Audio menu ................................... 162Convenience submenu .................. 166Display messages .......................... 169Factory settings submenu ............. 167Important safety notes .................. 157Instrument cluster submenu .......... 165Lighting submenu .......................... 165Menu overview .............................. 159Message memory .......................... 170Navigation menu ............................ 161Operation ....................................... 158RACETIMER ................................... 168

Index 13

Service menu ................................. 164Settings menu ............................... 164Standard display ............................ 160Telephone menu ............................ 163Trip menu ...................................... 160TV operation .................................. 163Vehicle submenu ........................... 166Video DVD operation ..................... 162

Operating safetyDeclaration of conformity ................ 26Important safety notes .................... 26

Operating systemsee On-board computer

OperationDigital Operator's Manual ................ 22

Operator's ManualVehicle equipment ........................... 24

Outside temperature display ........... 157Overhead control panel ...................... 36Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 56

PPaint code number ............................ 275Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 233Parking

Engaging park position .................. 110Important safety notes .................. 120Parking brake ................................ 121Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ................................. 83Rear view camera .......................... 143Switching off the engine ................ 121see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidsee Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONICsee Rear view camera

Parking brakeApplying ......................................... 121Display message ............................ 172Emergency braking ........................ 121Warning lamp ................................. 193

Parking lampsSwitching on/off .............................. 86

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 142

Driving system ............................... 140Function/notes ............................. 140Important safety notes .................. 140Problem (malfunction) ................... 142Range of the sensors ..................... 140Trailer towing ................................. 142Warning display ............................. 141

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFIndicator lamp .................................. 39Problems (malfunctions) .................. 55

Permanent all-wheel driveOff-road system ............................. 139

Pets in the vehicle ............................... 57Phone book


Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 236Power supply (trailer) ....................... 156Power washers .................................. 232Program selector button .................. 113Protection against theft

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 61Immobilizer ...................................... 61

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 23

Pulling awayAutomatic transmission ................. 105General notes ................................ 105Trailer ............................................ 105

QQR code

Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1Rescue card ..................................... 28

Qualified specialist workshop ........... 27

RRACE TIMER (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 168RACETIMER

Deleting all laps ............................. 169Displaying and starting .................. 168Displaying the intermediate time ... 168Resetting the current lap ............... 169Starting a new lap .......................... 168

14 Index

Stopping ........................................ 168Radiator cover ................................... 226Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 162Radio mode


Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 26Rear bench seat

Folding forward .............................. 208Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 102Rear door

Closing ............................................. 69Display message ............................ 186Important safety notes .................... 68Opening ........................................... 68

Rear fog lampDisplay message ............................ 176Replacing bulbs ............................... 91Switching on/off .............................. 86

Rear seat benchFolding into an upright position ..... 208

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 235Display in the multimedia system .. 143Function/notes ............................. 143General notes ................................ 143Switching on/off ........................... 143

Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ................... 100Switching on/off ........................... 100

Rear window wiperReplacing the wiper blade ................ 93Switching on/off .............................. 93

Rear-view mirrorDipping (automatic) ......................... 83

Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)

Important safety notes .................. 280Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 32Important safety notes .................. 118Refueling process .......................... 118see Fuel

Remote controlProgramming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 222

Replacing bulbsBackup lamp .................................... 91Brake lamp ...................................... 91Important safety notes .................... 88Overview of bulb types .................... 89Rear fog lamp .................................. 91Tail lamp .......................................... 91Turn signal (rear) .............................. 91Turn signals (front) ........................... 90

Reporting safety defects .................... 27Rescue card ......................................... 28Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 179Warning lamp ................................. 194

Residual heatSwitching on/off ........................... 101

Restraint systemDisplay message ............................ 173Introduction ..................................... 38Warning lamp ................................. 193Warning lamp (function) ................... 38

Reversing lamps (display mes-sage) ................................................... 176Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 25Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 237Route (navigation)

see Route guidance (navigation)Route guidance


Route guidance (navigation) ............ 161

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 49see Occupant safety

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

SD cardInserting ........................................ 203Inserting/removing ........................ 203

Index 15

Removing ....................................... 203SD memory card


Search & Sendsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198

Seat backrestFolding back .................................. 207

Seat beltsAdjusting the height ......................... 41center rear-compartment seat ......... 42Cleaning ......................................... 237Correct usage .................................. 41Fastening ......................................... 41Important safety guidelines ............. 40Introduction ..................................... 39Releasing ......................................... 43Warning lamp ................................. 188Warning lamp (function) ................... 43

Seat heatingIndicator lamp (malfunction) ............ 79

Seat ventilationIndicator lamp (malfunction) ............ 79

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 76Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port .................................................. 78Adjusting the head restraint ............ 76Cleaning the cover ......................... 236Correct driver's seat position ........... 74Important safety notes .................... 74Overview .......................................... 74Storing settings (memory func-tion) ................................................. 83Switching seat heating on/off ......... 78Switching seat ventilation on/off .... 79

Selector leverCleaning ......................................... 236

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 234Service interval display

Displaying a service message (on-board computer) ............................ 231

Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 164Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 279Coolant (engine) ............................ 279

Engine oil ....................................... 278Fuel ................................................ 276Important safety notes .................. 276Notes ............................................. 276Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 280Washer fluid ................................... 280

Setting the air distribution ................. 98Setting the date/time format


Setting the languagesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198

Setting the timesee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198

SettingsCalling up a stored setting ............... 84Factory (on-board computer) ......... 167On-board computer ....................... 164

SETUP (on-board computer,Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .................. 168Shift ranges ....................................... 114Side impact air bag ............................. 45Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 176Side windows

Convenience closing feature ............ 70Convenience opening feature .......... 70Important safety information ........... 69Opening/closing .............................. 69Overview .......................................... 69Problem (malfunction) ..................... 70

SIRIUS servicessee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198

Sliding sunroofImportant safety notes .................... 71Opening/closing .............................. 72Operating manually .......................... 72Problem (malfunction) ..................... 73

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 65Changing the programming ............. 64Checking the battery ....................... 65Convenience closing feature ............ 70

16 Index

Convenience opening feature .......... 70Display message ............................ 187Door central locking/unlocking ....... 63Important safety notes .................... 63Loss ................................................. 66Mechanical key ................................ 64Overview .......................................... 63Positions (ignition lock) ................. 104Problem (malfunction) ..................... 66Starting the engine ........................ 105

SMSsee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198

Snow chains ...................................... 253Socket (12 V)

Cargo compartment ....................... 213Front-passenger footwell ............... 212General notes ................................ 212Rear compartment ......................... 213

SoundSwitching on/off ........................... 199

Spare fuses ........................................ 249Spare wheel

Spare wheel bracket at the rear .... 239Stainless-steel spare hub cap ........ 239

Special seat belt retractor .................. 50Specialist workshop ............................ 27Speedometer

Digital ............................................ 160In the Instrument cluster ................. 32Segments ...................................... 157Selecting the display unit ............... 165

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 176Switching on/off .............................. 86

Starting the engineImportant safety notes .................. 104

Steering (display message) .............. 187Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 80Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 158Cleaning ......................................... 236Important safety notes .................... 79Paddle shifters ............................... 114Steering wheel heating .................... 80Storing settings (memory func-tion) ................................................. 83

Steering wheel heatingIndicator lamp (malfunction) ............ 80

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 114Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 168Stowage areas ................................... 205Stowage compartment

Door stowage compartment .......... 206Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 206Cup holders ................................... 210Glove box ....................................... 205Important safety information ......... 205Stowage net ................................... 206Stowage pockets ........................... 206

Stowage net ....................................... 206Summer opening

see Convenience opening featureSummer tires

In winter ........................................ 253Sun visor ............................................ 210Surround lighting (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 165SUV

(Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 26Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 101Switching on media mode

Via the device list .......................... 203

TTachometer ........................................ 157Tail lamp

Replacing bulbs ............................... 91Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 176Tank content

Fuel gauge ....................................... 32Technical data

Capacities ...................................... 276Drawbar load (maximum) ............... 284Information .................................... 274Trailer loads ................................... 284Vehicle data ................................... 281

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 163Authorizing a mobile phone (con-necting) ......................................... 202

Index 17

Connecting a mobile phone (gen-eral information) ............................ 201Display message ............................ 187Menu (on-board computer) ............ 163Number from the phone book ........ 163Redialing ........................................ 164Rejecting/ending a call ................. 163see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198Switching between mobilephones ........................................... 203see Mobile phone

TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 158Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 167Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 167Outside temperature ...................... 157Setting (climate control) .................. 98

Tilt/sliding sunroofsee Sliding sunroof

Timesee separate operating instructions

Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 168Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 257Checking manually ........................ 257Display message ............................ 183Maximum ....................................... 256Notes ............................................. 255Recommended ............................... 254

Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 258Function/notes ............................. 257General notes ................................ 257Important safety notes .................. 257Radio type approval for the tirepressure monitor ........................... 260Restarting ...................................... 259Warning lamp ................................. 197Warning message .......................... 259

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 269Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 267Bar (definition) ............................... 267Changing a wheel .......................... 269Characteristics .............................. 267

Checking ........................................ 251Curb weight (definition) ................. 268Definition of terms ......................... 267Direction of rotation ...................... 270Display message ............................ 183Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 269DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 267DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 266GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 268GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defi-nition) ............................................ 268GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 268GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 268Important safety notes .................. 251Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 268Information on driving .................... 251Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 268Labeling (overview) ........................ 264Load bearing index (definition) ...... 269Load index ..................................... 266Load index (definition) ................... 268Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 268Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 268Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 268Maximum tire load ......................... 266Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 268Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 269PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 269Replacing ....................................... 269Service life ..................................... 252Sidewall (definition) ....................... 269Snow chains .................................. 253Speed rating (definition) ................ 268Storing ........................................... 270Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 267

18 Index

Summer tires in winter .................. 253Temperature .................................. 263TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 269Tire bead (definition) ...................... 269Tire pressure (definition) ................ 269Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 268Tire size (data) ............................... 273Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 264Tire tread ....................................... 252Tire tread (definition) ..................... 269Total load limit (definition) ............. 269Traction ......................................... 263Traction (definition) ....................... 269Tread wear ..................................... 263TWR (permissible trailer drawbarnoseweight) (definition) ................. 269Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 263Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 267Wear indicator (definition) ............. 269Wheel and tire combination ........... 273Wheel rim (definition) .................... 268see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 52Tow-starting

Emergency engine starting ............ 248Important safety notes .................. 246

Towing a trailerAxle load, permissible .................... 284Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ......... 235Coupling up a trailer ...................... 154Decoupling a trailer ....................... 155Driving tips .................................... 151Important safety notes .................. 149Installing the ball coupling ............. 152Lights display message .................. 176Pulling away with a trailer .............. 105Shift range ..................................... 113Trailer loads ................................... 284Trailer tow hitch ............................. 284

Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 246In the event of malfunctions .......... 248With both axles on the ground ....... 247

Towing eyeFront .............................................. 247Rear ............................................... 247

Traffic reportssee also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198

Trailer7-pin connector ............................. 156Power supply ................................. 156

Trailer couplingsee Towing a trailer

Trailer loadsTechnical data ............................... 284

Trailer loads and drawbar nose-weights ............................................... 155Trailer tow hitch

Ball position ................................... 284Trailer towing

ESP® ................................................ 60PARKTRONIC ................................. 142Permissible trailer loads anddrawbar noseweights ..................... 155

Transfer caseGeneral notes ................................ 145Shift range ..................................... 145Shifting .......................................... 146Shifting (general notes) .................. 146Shifting (important safety notes) ... 146Shifting to neutral .......................... 147Switching off the off-road gearratio ............................................... 146Switching on the off-road gearratio ............................................... 146

Transmissionsee Automatic transmission

Transmission positions .................... 112Transporting the vehicle .................. 247Traveling uphill

Brow of hill ..................................... 130Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 236Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 160Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 160Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 160

Index 19

Turn signalsDisplay message ............................ 176Replacing bulbs (front) ..................... 90Switching on/off .............................. 87

TVOperating (on-board computer) ..... 163see Separate operating instructions

Two-way radioFrequencies ................................... 274Installation ..................................... 274Transmission output (maximum) .... 274

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (defi-nition) ................................................. 269Type identification plate

see Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 68From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 67

USB devicesConnecting to the Media Inter-face ............................................... 203

VVanity mirror

Sun visor ........................................ 211Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 27Data acquisition ............................... 28Display message ............................ 186Equipment ....................................... 24Individual settings .......................... 164Limited Warranty ............................. 28Loading .......................................... 260Locking (in an emergency) ............... 68Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 63Lowering ........................................ 272Maintenance .................................... 25Operation outside the USA/Canada ............................................ 25Parking .......................................... 120Parking for a long period ................ 122Pulling away ................................... 105Raising ........................................... 270Securing from rolling away ............ 270

Tow-starting ................................... 248Towing ........................................... 246Transporting .................................. 247Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 68Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 63Vehicle data ................................... 281

Vehicle data ....................................... 281Vehicle data (off-road driving)

Approach/departure angle ............ 283Fording depth ................................ 283Maximum gradient climbing abil-ity .................................................. 283

Vehicle dimensions ........................... 281Vehicle emergency locking ................ 68Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 275Vehicle tool kit .................................. 239Ventilation

Setting the airflow ........................... 98Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 162see also Digital Operator's Man-ual .................................................. 198

VINType plate ...................................... 275

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 190Brakes ........................................... 189Check Engine ................................. 194Coolant .......................................... 194Distance warning ........................... 196DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 196ESP® .............................................. 191ESP® OFF ....................................... 192Fuel tank ........................................ 194General notes ................................ 187Overview .......................................... 32Parking brake ................................ 193PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 39Reserve fuel ................................... 194Restraint system ............................ 193Seat belt ........................................ 188Tire pressure monitor .................... 197

Warning triangle ................................ 238

20 Index

Warranty .............................................. 24Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 187Weather display (COMAND)


Wheel and tire combinationsTires ............................................... 273

Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 272Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 269Checking ........................................ 251Cleaning ......................................... 233Important safety notes .................. 251Information on driving .................... 251Interchanging/changing ................ 269Mounting a new wheel ................... 272Mounting a wheel .......................... 270Removing a wheel .......................... 272Snow chains .................................. 253Storing ........................................... 270Tightening torque ........................... 272Wheel size/tire size ....................... 273

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 174Operation ......................................... 46

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ........................................ 99

Windshield heating ............................. 99Windshield washer fluid

see Windshield washer systemWindshield washer system

Adding washer fluid ....................... 229Notes ............................................. 280

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ..................... 94Rear window wiper .......................... 93Replacing the wiper blades .............. 93Switching on/off .............................. 92

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 252Slippery road surfaces ................... 126Snow chains .................................. 253

Winter operationOverview ........................................ 252Radiator cover ............................... 226

Summer tires ................................. 253Winter tires

M+S tires ....................................... 253Wiper blades

Cleaning ......................................... 234Important safety notes .................... 93Replacing ......................................... 93

Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 236

Index 21

Introduction

The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-mation about the safe operation of your vehicle.The Digital Operator's Manual provides compre-hensive and specifically adapted information onyour vehicle's equipment and multimedia sys-tem. You can call up the Digital Operator's Man-ual via the multimedia system.

i You will not incur any costs when calling upthe Digital Operator's Manual. The DigitalOperator's Manual works without connectingto the Internet.

There are three ways to access the topics of theDigital Operator's Manual:RVisual searchThe visual search allows you to explore yourvehicle "virtually". Starting from either thevehicle exterior view or interior view, you canaccess many of the different topics coveredby the Digital Operator's Manual. To accessthe vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-cle interior" view.RKeyword searchThe keyword search allows you to search for akeyword by entering characters.RContentsYou can select individual sections in the con-tents.

i The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-ted for safety reasons while driving.

Operation

Calling up the Digital Operator's Man-ualX Press theØ button on the center console.The overview relating to the vehicle appears.

X Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item byturning3 or pressing7 the controller.

X Confirm7 the message about the warningand safety notes.The basic menu for the Digital Operator'sManual appears.

Operating the Digital Operator's Man-ual

General notesPlease observe the information about the oper-ation of the controller (Y page 199).

Content pagesThe content pages can be accessed bymeans ofa visual search, a keyword search or using thecontents.

X To scroll forward/back: turn3 the con-troller.

X To display in full-screen or animation: slide8 the controller to the left:.

X To select information text or save book-marks: slide9 the controller to theright;.

X To select a link: slide6 the controllerdownwards=.

X To exit a content page: select the%symbol?.

X To call up the basic menu of the DigitalOperator's Manual: selectÞ symbolA.

X To switch functions to the multimediasystem using the buttons on the centerconsole: press the$,%,Õ orØbutton.The selected menu appears. The Digital Oper-ator's Manual remains open in the back-ground.

22 Digital Operator's Manual

Protecting the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.

Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the Operator'sManual requires you todispose ofmaterials, first try to regenerate or re-use them. Observe the relevant environmentalrules and regulations when disposing of materi-als. In this way you will help to protect the envi-ronment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audio sys-tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairsor welding. You could impair the operatingefficiency of the restraint systems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels aswell as accessories relevant to safety whichhave not been approved byMercedes-Benz. Thiscould lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts 23

Introductio

n

Z

systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu-ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories thathave been specifically approved for your vehi-cle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz partsshould be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintaina supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts fornecessary service and repair work. In addition,strategically located parts delivery centers pro-vide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification number(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benzparts (Y page 275).

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmenti ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Bear in mindthat your vehicle may not feature all functionsdescribed here. This also applies to safety-relevant systems and functions. The equip-ment in your vehiclemay therefore differ fromthat shown in the descriptions and illustra-tions.

The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-let are important documents and should be keptin the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

WarrantyThe Limited Warranty for your vehicle applies inaccordance with the warranty terms and condi-tions in the Service and Warranty Informationbooklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordance with the following warranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission System WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Islandand Vermont Emission Control System War-rantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Replacement parts and accessories are coveredby the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessorieswarranties. These are available at any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Should you lose your Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, have an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet will be posted to you.

Information for customers in Califor-niaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after a reason-able number of repair attempts Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or servicefacilities fail to fix one or more substantialdefects or malfunctions in the vehicle that arecovered by its express warranty.During the period of 18 months from originaldelivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on theodometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or moreof the following occurs:(1) the substantial defect or malfunction can

result in death or serious injuries for the

24 Service and vehicle operationIntroductio

n

vehicle occupants while driving and thisdefect has already been repaired at leasttwice and Mercedes-Benz, LLC has beeninformed in writing of the necessity of arepair.

(2) the defect or malfunction, though less seri-ous than (1) above, has already beenrepaired at least four times and Mercedes-Benz has been informed in writing of thenecessity of a repair.

(3) the vehicle cannot be used for longer than30 calendar days because of repair workresulting from this or other substantialdefects or malfunctions.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance Center3 Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceAlways bring the Maintenance Booklet with youwhen taking the vehicle to an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. Your customer serviceadvisor will enter every service into your Main-tenance Booklet on your behalf.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram offers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100(Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Programbrochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"section in the Service and Warranty Booklet(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu-ment wallet.

Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, please sendus the "Notification of Address Change" in the

Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-ing you in a timelymanner should the need arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter-ature in the vehicle so that it is available to thenext owner.If you have purchased a used car, please send usthe "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in theService and Warranty Booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaWhen you are abroad with your vehicle, observethe following points:RService facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.RLead-free fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconverter may not be available. Leaded fuelcan cause damage to the catalytic converter.RThe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane number. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are available fordelivery in Europe through our European Deliv-ery Program. For details, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or write to one of thefollowing addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Service and vehicle operation 25

Introductio

n

Z

Sports Utility Vehicle

G WARNINGDue to the high center of gravity, the vehiclemay start to skid and roll over in the event ofan abrupt steering maneuver and/or whenthe vehicle's speed is not adapted to the roadconditions. There is a risk of an accident.Always adapt your speed and driving style tothe vehicle's driving characteristics and to theprevailing road and weather conditions.

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-over rate than other types of vehicles.Failure to operate this vehicle safely may resultin an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severeor fatal injury.In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signif-icantly more likely to die than a person wearinga seat belt.You and all vehicle occupants should alwayswear your seat belts.

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb, a speed bump or a pothole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the underbody orparts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under-body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could bedamaged without the damage being visible.Components damaged in this way can unex-pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, nolonger withstand the loads they are designedto.If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-bustible materials such as leaves, grass ortwigs can gather between the underbody andthe underbody paneling. If these materialscome in contact with hot parts of the exhaustsystem, they can catch fire.In such situations, have the vehicle checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,paying attention to road and traffic condi-tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Declaration of conformity forwirelessvehicle componentsUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is

26 Operating safetyIntroductio

n

subject to the two following two conditions: 1)These devices may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and 2) These devices must accept anyinterference received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation. Changesor modifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could void theuser’s authority to operate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) These devices maynot cause interference, and (2) These devicesmust accept any interference, including inter-ference that may cause undesired operation ofthe device."

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intended forthe connection of diagnostic equipment at aqualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to a diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of vehicle systems. As a result, theoperating safety of the vehicle could be affec-ted. There is a risk of an accident.Only connect equipment to a diagnostics con-nection in the vehicle, which is approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off and equipmenton the diagnostics connection is used, thestarter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-mation being reset, for example. This may leadto the vehicle failing tomeet the requirements ofthe next emissions test during the main inspec-tion.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-fied specialist workshop. It has the necessaryspecialist knowledge, tools and qualifications tocorrectly carry out the work required on yourvehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-evant to safety.Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.Always have the following work carried out at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information when drivingyour vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRtechnical data for the vehicleRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotorvehicles

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is reproduced as required ofall manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to theNational Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of1966.If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform the

Operating safety 27

Introductio

n

Z

National Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manual aboutthe proper operation of your vehicle as well asabout possible vehicle damage. Damage toyour vehicle that arises from culpable contra-ventions against these instructions is not cov-ered either by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War-ranty.

QR codes for rescue cards

The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flapand on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In theevent of an accident, rescue services can usethe QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-cue card for your vehicle. The current rescuecard contains the most important informationabout your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. therouting of the electric cables.You can find more information underwww.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.

Data stored in the vehicle

Data storageA wide range of electronic components in yourvehicle contain data memories.

These data memories temporarily or perma-nently store technical information about:Rthe vehicle's operating stateRincidentsRmalfunctionsIn general, this technical information docu-ments the state of a component, a module, asystem or the surroundings.These include, for example:Roperating conditions of system components,e.g. fluid levelsRthe vehicle's statusmessages and those of itsindividual components, e.g. number of wheelrevolutions/speed, deceleration in move-ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedalpositionRmalfunctions and defects in important systemcomponents, e.g. lights, brakesRvehicle reactions and operating conditions inspecial driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-ment, intervention of stability control sys-temsRambient conditions, e.g. outside temperatureThis data is of an exclusively technical natureand can be used to:Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-tions and defectsRanalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-dentRoptimize vehicle functionsThe data cannot be used to trace the vehicle'smovements.When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-mation can be read from the event datamemoryand malfunction data memory.Services include, for example:Rrepair servicesRservice processesRwarrantiesRquality assuranceThe vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-vice network (including the manufacturer) usingspecial diagnostic testers. More detailed infor-mation is obtained from it, if required.After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-mation is deleted from the malfunction memoryor is continually overwritten.When operating the vehicle, situations are con-ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-

28 Data stored in the vehicleIntroductio

n

tion with other information (if necessary, underconsultation with an authorized expert), couldbe traced to a person.Examples include:Raccident reportsRdamage to the vehicleRwitness statementsFurther additional functions that have been con-tractually agreed upon with the customer allowcertain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-cle as well. The additional functions include, forexample, vehicle location in case of an emer-gency.

COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID)If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle'soperation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-uations, and the location of the vehicle may becompiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-tem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator'sManual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-tions.

Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with anevent data recorder (EDR). The main purpose ofan EDR is to record, in certain crash or nearcrash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how a vehicle's systemsperformed. The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safety systemsfor a short period of time, typically 30 secondsor less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:RHow various systems in your vehicle wereoperatingRWhether or not the driver and passengersafety belts were buckled/fastenedRHow far (if at all) the driver was depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRHow fast the vehicle was traveling

These data can help provide a better under-standing of the circumstances in which crashesand injuries occur. NOTE: EDRdata are recordedby your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situa-tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDRunder normal driving conditions and no personaldata (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location)are recorded. However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement could combine the EDR datawith the type of personally identifying data rou-tinely acquired during a crash investigation.Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is neededto read data that is recorded by an EDR, andspecial equipment is required. In addition to thevehicle manufacturer, other parties that havethe special equipment, such as law enforce-ment, can read the information by accessing thevehicle or the EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the CrashData Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extractdata from the EDR is commercially available,Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expresslydisclaims any and all liability arising from theextraction of this information by unauthorizedMercedes-Benz personnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or, ifthe vehicle is leased, without the consent of thelessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by law enforce-ment; by federal, state or local government; inconnectionwith or arising out of litigation involv-ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of theRestraint SystemModule. Tamperingwith, alter-ing, modifying or removing the EDR componentmay result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-tem Module and other systems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.Thismeans that in the event of such conflict, thefederal regulation governs. As of February 2013,13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.

Information on copyright

Free and open-source softwareInformation on license for free and open-sourcesoftware used in your vehicle can be found on

Information on copyright 29

Introductio

n

Z

the data carrier in your vehicle document walletand, including updates, on the following web-site:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

Registered trademarksRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-tooth SIG Inc.RDTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby® and MLP™ are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg-istered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of John-son Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarksof Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of HarmanInternational Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.RSIRIUS® is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-uity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGAT Survey® and related brands are regis-tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.

30 Information on copyrightIntroductio

n

Cockpit

Function Page

: Combination switch 87

; Steering wheel paddle shift-ers 114

= Instrument cluster 32

? Horn

A Overhead control panel 36

B PARKTRONIC warning dis-play 140

Function Page

C Climate control system 95

D Ignition lock 104

E Adjusts the steering wheel 79

F Cruise control lever 131

G Light switch 85

H Opens the hood 225

Cockpit 31

Ataglance

Instrument cluster

Function Page

: Speedometer with segments 157Warning and indicator lamps:÷ ESP® 191å ESP® OFF 191! ABS 190J Brakes (yellow) 189L Low-beam headlamps 85T Parking lamps 86K High-beam headlamps 87Brakes (red) 189$ USA onlyJ Canada onlyParking brake 193F USA onlyJ Canada only· Distance warning 196

; #! Turn signals 87

= Multifunction display 159

Function Page

? Tachometer 157Warning and indicator lamps:R Rear fog lamp 86; Check Engine 194h Tire pressure monitor 1976 Restraint system 38ü Seat belts 188

A Coolant temperature gauge 158Warning and indicator lamps:? Coolant 194

B Fuel level indicatorWarning and indicator lamps:8 Reserve fuel with fuelfiller flap location indicator(right-hand side) 194

C Instrument cluster lighting 157

32 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page

: Multifunction display 159

; Multimedia system display

= ?

Switches on the Voice Con-trol System

? ~

Rejects or ends a call 163Exits the telephone book/redial memory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redial mem-oryWX

Adjusts the volume

Function Page8

Switches sound on/off

A =;

Selects a menu 1589:

Selects a submenu or scrollsthrough lists 158a

Confirms a selection 158Hides display messages 170

B %

Back 158Switches off the Voice Con-trol System

i Further information:Ron the multimedia system in the DigitalOperator's ManualRon the Voice Control System in the sepa-rate operating instructions

Multifunction steering wheel 33

Ataglance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page

: Multimedia system; see theDigital Operator's Manual

; c Seat heating 78

= s Seat ventilation 79

? c PARKTRONIC 140

A è ECO start/stop func-tion 106

Function Page

B £ Hazard warning lamps 87

C 4 5 PASSENGER AIR-BAG OFF indicator lamp 39

D å ESP® 59

34 Center consoleAt

aglance

Center console, lower section

Function Page

E Stowage compartment/ashtray 211

F Automatic transmissionselector lever 110

G Selects park position 110

H + Activates/deactivatesthe off-road gear ratio 146

I Stowage compartment 205

J Stowage compartment withMedia Interface 205

K Cigarette lighter 212

Function Page

L Controller 199

M Switches the windshieldheating on/off 99

N e Adjustable damping 109

O Ú Selects the drive pro-gram 113Mercedes-AMG vehicles:Ñ Selects the drive pro-gram 113

P Parking brake 121

Center console 35

Ataglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page

: p Switches the left-handreading lamp on/off 88

; c Switches the front inte-rior lighting on 88

= u Switches the rear inte-rior lighting on/off 88

? | Switches the front inte-rior lighting/automatic inte-rior lighting control off 88

A p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 88

B ¡ Opens/closes the slid-ing sunroof 72

Function Page

C ï Info call button(mbrace system) 217

D Rear-view mirror 81

E Buttons for the garage dooropener 224

F F Breakdown assistancecall button (mbrace system) 216

G G SOS button (mbracesystem) 215

H Microphone for mbrace sys-tem, telephone and the VoiceControl System, see the sep-arate operating instructions

36 Overhead control panelAt

aglance

Door control panel

Function Page

: nOverride feature for therear side windows 56

; W Opens/closes the sidewindows 69

= 7Zö\Adjusts and folds the exteriormirrors in/out electrically 81

? r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors and steeringcolumn 83

Function Page

A Adjusts the seats electrically 76

B %& Locks/unlocksthe vehicle 67

C Opens the door 67

Door control panel 37

Ataglance

Occupant safety

Introduction to the restraint systemThe restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with parts ofthe vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.The restraint system can also reduce the forcestowhich vehicle occupants are subjected duringan accident.The restraint system comprises:RSeat belt systemRAir bagsRChild restraint systemRChild seat securing systemsThe components of the restraint system work inconjunction with each other. They can onlydeploy their protective function if, at all times, allvehicle occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly(Y page 41)Rhave the seat and head restraint adjustedproperly (Y page 74)

As the driver, you also have to make sure thatthe steering wheel is adjusted correctly.Observe the information relating to the correctdriver's seat position (Y page 74).You also have to make sure that an air bag caninflate properly if deployed (Y page 43).An air bag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. As an additional safety device, the air bagincreases the level of protection for vehicleoccupants in the event of an accident. For exam-ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protectionoffered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bagsare not deployed.When an accident occurs, onlythe air bags that increase protection in that par-ticular accident situation are deployed. How-ever, seat belts and air bags generally do notprotect against objects penetrating the vehiclefrom the outside.Information on restraint system operation canbe found under "Triggering of the EmergencyTensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 46).See "Children in the vehicle" for information onchildren traveling with you in the vehicle as wellas on child restraint systems (Y page 49).


G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary to modify components of therestraint system to accommodate a personwith disabilities, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only:for further information contact our CustomerAssistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1‑800‑367‑6372).

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only usedriving aids which have been approved specifi-cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.

Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on and atregular intervals while the engine is running.Therefore, malfunctions can be detected ingood time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp on theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-nents of the restraint system are in operationalreadiness.Amalfunction has occurred if the 6 restraintsystem warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switchedonRdoes not go out after a few seconds with theengine runningRlights up again while the engine is running

G WARNINGIf the restraint system is malfunctioning,restraint system components may be trig-

38 Occupant safetySafety

gered unintentionally or may not deploy asintended during an accident. This can affectfor example the Emergency TensioningDevice or the air bag. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: ispart of the BabySmart™ air bag deactivationsystem.A permanently lit PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp informs you that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Depending on the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front air bag musteither be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-lowing points. You must make sure of this bothbefore and during a journey.RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front air bag isenabled or deactivated depends on the instal-led child restraint system, and the age andsize of the child. Therefore, always observethe information on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 49). There you will also find instruc-tions on rearward and forward-facing childrestraint systems on the front-passengerseat.RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp must be off. Be sure toobserve the notes on "Seatbelts“ (Y page 39) and "Air bags"(Y page 43). There you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.

Observe the information on the BabySmart™ airbag deactivation system in the front-passengerseat (Y page 53).

Seat belts

IntroductionSeat belts are the most effective means ofrestricting the movement of vehicle occupantsin the event of an accident or the vehicle rollingover. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupantscoming into contact with parts of the vehicleinterior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicleoccupant in the best position in relation to theair bag.The seat belt system comprises:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices for the frontseat belts and the outer seat belts in the rearRSeat belt force limitersIf the seat belt is pulled out at the belt sash guidequickly or with a jerky movement, the beltretractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac-ted any further.The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens theseat belt in an accident, pulling the belt closeagainst the body. However it does not pull thevehicle occupant back in the direction of thebackrest.The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-rect an incorrect seat position or the routing ofan incorrectly fastened seat belt.When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps toreduce the force exerted by the seat belt on thevehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters for the front seats aresynchronized with the front air bags, whichabsorb part of the deceleration force. This canreduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu-pants during an accident.

! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle ofthe front-passenger seat. This may otherwiselead to the triggering of the Emergency Ten-sioning Device in the event of an accident,which will then need to be replaced.

Occupant safety 39

Safety

Z

Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEvenwhere this is not required by law, all vehicleoccupants should correctly fasten their seatbelts before starting the journey.

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannotperform its intended protective function. Anincorrectly fastened seat belt can also causeinjuries, for example, in the event of an acci-dent or when braking or changing directionabruptly. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-ting properly.

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.

G WARNINGPersons less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall cannotwear the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional and suitable restraint system. If theseat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-form its intended protective function. Anincorrectly fastened seat belt can also causeinjuries, for example, in the event of an acci-dent or when braking or changing direction

abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50m) tall in suitable additional restraintsystems.

If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-cle. The child restraint systemmust be appro-priate to the age, weight and size of the childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 49) in addition to the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation and oper-ating instructions

G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleached or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied.

Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,although the damage may not be visible, e.g.due to splinters of glass.Modified or damagedseat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.Modified Emergency Tensioning Devicescould accidentally trigger or fail to deploywhen necessary. This poses an increased riskof injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts areundamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Only use seat belts that have been approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.


Proper use of the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 40).All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seatbelt correctly before beginning the journey. Alsomake sure that all vehicle occupants are alwayswearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicleis in motion.When fastening the seat belt, always make surethat:Rthe seat belt buckle tongue is inserted onlyinto the belt buckle belonging to that seat.Rthe seat belt is pulled tight across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can the forces which occur be dis-tributed over the area of the belt.Rthe shoulder section of the belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.The shoulder section of the seat belt shouldnot touch your neck or be routed under yourarm or behind your back. Where possible,adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height.Rthe lap belt is taut and passes across your lapas low down as possible.The lap belt must always be routed acrossyour hip joints and not across your abdomen.This applies particularly to pregnant women.If necessary, push the lap belt down to yourhip joint and pull it tight using the shouldersection of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-ted or fragile objects.If you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, storethese in a suitable place.Ronly one person is using a seat belt.Infants and children must never travel sittingon the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the vehicle occupant and seat belt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt ifthe seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants.Also ensure that there are never objectsbetween a person and the seat, e.g. cushions.

Seat belts are only intended to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-gage or loads (Y page 204).

Fastening and adjusting the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 40) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 41).If the center rear seat belt is being used, alsoobserve the information about the seat belt forthe center rear seat (Y page 42).

Basic illustrationX Adjust the seat (Y page 74).The seat backrest must be in an almostupright position.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of belt sashguide= and engage belt tongue; into beltbuckle:.

X If necessary, pull up on the shoulder sectionof the seat belt to tighten the belt across yourbody.

Occupant safety 41

Safety

Z

The shoulder section of the seat belt mustalways be routed across the center of the shoul-der. Adjust the belt sash guide if necessary.X To raise: slide the belt sash guide up.The belt sash guide engages in various posi-tions.

X To lower: pull release button? and slide thebelt sash guide down.

X Let go of release button? in the desiredposition and make sure that the belt sashguide engages.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecurely fasten child restraint systems in thevehicle. Further information can be found under"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 50).

Seat belt for the center rear seat

G WARNINGWhen the three-point seat belt for the centerrear seat is not in use, it may be thrownaround while driving, e.g. when braking or inan accident. There is a risk of injury.When the three-point seat belt for the centerrear seat is not in use, always secure both beltbuckle tongues in the retainer.

: Bracket for seat belt tongues; Belt buckle for fixed belt tongue= Release button for fixed belt tongue? Fixed belt tongueA Belt buckle for movable belt tongue

B Release button for movable belt tongueC Movable belt tongue

X Pull both seat belt tongues? andC frombracket:.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outletand engage fixed belt tongue? in beltbuckle;.


X To fasten the seat belt: pull the seat beltsmoothly from the belt outlet and engagemovable belt tongueC in belt buckleA.

X If necessary, pull up on the shoulder sectionof the seat belt to tighten the belt across yourbody.

Releasing seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will betrapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.This could damage the door, the door trimpanel and the seat belt. Damaged seat beltscan no longer fulfill their protective functionand must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

X Press the release button in the belt buckle,hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the beltback.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-pants must wear their seat belts. It may light upcontinuously or flash. In addition, there may bea warning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt hasalready been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time theengine is started. If, after six seconds, the driveror front-passenger seat belt has not been fas-tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat

belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driv-er's and front-passenger seat belts are fastenedor a front door is opened again, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after theengine is started, an additional warning tone willsound. The warning tone switches off after sixseconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas-tened.If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarningtone sounds. A warning tone also sounds withincreasing intensity for 60 seconds or until thedriver or front passenger have fastened theirseat belts.If the driver or front passenger unfasten theirseat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn-ing is activated again.

Air bags

IntroductionThe installation point of an air bag can be rec-ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.An air bag complements the correctly fastenedseat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. Theair bag provides additional protection in appli-cable accident situations.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. Thedifferent air bag systems function independ-ently from one another (Y page 46).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.


G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended andcould even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.

RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in an almost upright position. The center ofthe head restraint must support the head atabout eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passenger seatsas far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-tionmust allow the vehicle to be driven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against thedoor or side window. Youmay otherwise be inthe deployment area of the air bags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in frontof the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-board, for example. Your feet may otherwisebe in the deployment area of the air bag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannotbe worn correctly.

If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under twelve years ofage and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitablechild restraint systems.RChild restraint systems should be installed onthe rear seats.ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatwhen the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated(Y page 39).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 49) and on the "Child restraint sys-

tem on the front-passenger seat"(Y page 54) in addition to the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation and oper-ating instructions.

Objects in the vehicle interior may preventan air bag from functioning correctly. Beforestarting your journey and to avoid risks resultingfrom the speed of the air bag as it deploys, makesure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an air bagRthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillarRthere are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers,hanging on the grab handles or coat hooksRno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploymentarea of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,rear side trim or side wallsRno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are inthe pockets of your clothing. Store suchobjects in a suitable place

G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyanymore. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.


Front air bags! Do not place heavy objects on the front-passenger seat. This could cause the systemto identify the seat as being occupied. In theevent of an accident, the restraint systems onthe front-passenger side may be triggeredand have to be replaced.

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of the steer-ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag;deploys in front of and above the glove box.When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection for the occu-pants in the front seats.A permanently lit PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp informs you that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated(Y page 39).The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Ran occupant is detected on the front-passenger seatRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampdoes not light up (Y page 53)Rthe restraint system control unit predicts ahigh accident severity

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-vent deployment of the air bags integratedinto the seats. Consequently, the air bagscannot protect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. In addition, the functions ofBabySmart™ may be impaired. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Side impact air bags: deploy next to the outerbolster of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bag offersadditional thorax protection. However, it doesnot protect the:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the side impact airbag is deployed on the side on which the impactoccurs.

Pelvis air bags

G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-vent deployment of the air bags integratedinto the seats. Consequently, the air bagscannot protect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. In addition, the functions ofBabySmart™ may be impaired. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

Pelvis air bags: deploy below next to the outerseat cushions.When activated, the pelvis air bag increases thelevel of protection for vehicle occupants on theside of the vehicle on which the impact occurs.The pelvis air bag is deployed on the side of theimpact.

Window curtain air bags

Window curtain air bags: are integrated intothe side of the roof frame and deployed in thearea from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.When deployed, the window curtain air bagenhances the level of protection for the head.However, it does not protect the chest or arms.In the event of a side impact, the window curtainair bag is deployed on the side on which theimpact occurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a window curtain air bag may bedeployed in other accident situations(Y page 46).

Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags


G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.

It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the air bagscontinue to perform their protective function forthe vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.

G WARNINGEmergency Tensioning Devices that havedeployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Have pyrotechnically triggered EmergencyTensioning Devices replaced immediately at aqualified specialist workshop.

If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggeredor air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. The 6 restraint system warninglamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear-ing. The powder that is released generally doesnot constitute a health hazard, but it may causeshort-term breathing difficulties in people withasthma or other respiratory problems. Providedit is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle


immediately or open the window in order to pre-vent breathing difficulties.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency TensioningDevices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,which may require special handling and regardfor the environment. National guidelines mustbe observed during disposal. In California, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, the restraintsystem control unit evaluates important physi-cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-eration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal orrear collision.An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered, if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system areoperational. You can find further informationunder: "Restraint system warning lamp"(Y page 38)Rthe seat belt buckle tongue has engaged inthe belt buckle of the respective front seat

The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rearcompartment are triggered independently of thelock status of the seat belts.If the restraint system control unit detects amore severe accident, further components ofthe restraint system are activated independ-ently of each other in certain frontal collisionsituations:RDriver's air bagRFront-passenger front air bagThe front-passenger front air bag is activated ordeactivated depending on the person on thefront-passenger seat. The front-passenger frontair bag can only deploy in an accident if thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.Observe the information on the PASSENGERAIRBAG OFF indicator lamp (Y page 39).Your vehicle has a two-stage driver's air bag.During the first deployment stage the driver's airbag fills with sufficient propellant gas to reduce

the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fullydeployed with the maximum amount of propel-lant gas if a second deployment threshold isreached within a few milliseconds.The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-sioning Devices and the air bag are determinedby evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration oracceleration which occurs at various points inthe vehicle. This process is pre-emptive innature. Deployment should take place in goodtime at the start of the collision.The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelerationand the direction of the force are essentiallydetermined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the collisionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehicleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided

Factors which can only be seen and measuredafter a collision has occurred do not play a deci-sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor dothey provide an indication of air bag deploy-ment.The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-out an air bag being deployed. This is the case ifonly parts which are relatively easily deformedare affected and the rate of deceleration is nothigh. Conversely, air bagsmay be deployed eventhough the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigidvehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occursas a result.If the restraint systemcontrol unit detects a sideimpact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicablecomponents of the restraint system are activa-ted independently of each other depending onthe apparent type of accident.RSide impact air bag and pelvis air bag on theside on which an impact occurs, independentfrom the Emergency Tensioning Device andseat belt usageThe side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the followingconditions:- BabySmart™ detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or

- the seat belt buckle tongue is engaged inthe belt buckle of the front-passenger seat

RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact,independently of the use of the seat belt and

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

independently of whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedREmergency Tensioning Devices, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection in this situationRWindow curtain air bags on the driver's andfront-passenger side in certain situationswhen the vehicle rolls over, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection to that provided by the seatbelt

i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems work independ-ently of each other.How the air bag system works is determinedby the severity of the accident detected,especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-eration and the apparent type of accident:RFrontal collisionRSide impactRRollover

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints


G WARNINGThe function of the head restraint may beimpaired if you:Rattach objects such as coat hangers to thehead restraints, for exampleRuse head restraint coversIf you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfilltheir intended protective function in the eventof an accident. In addition, objects attachedto the head restraints could endanger othervehicle occupants. There is an increased riskof injury.Do not attach any objects to the headrestraints and do not use head restraint cov-ers.

Method of operationNECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxuryhead restraints offer additional protectionagainst head and neck injuries. In the event of a

rear collision of a certain severity, the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraints on the driver's and front-passengerseats are moved forwards and upwards. Thisprovides better head support.If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PROluxury head restraints have been triggered in anaccident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver'sseat and the front-passenger seat(Y page 48). Otherwise, the additional protec-tion will not be available in the event of anotherrear-end collision. You can see that a NECK-PROhead restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head restrainthas been triggered if it is tilted forward and canno longer be adjusted.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thefunctionality of the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints checked at aqualified specialist workshop after a rear-endcollision.

Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO headrestraint/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraint

NECK-PRO head restraints

Do not insert your finger between the cushion ofthe head restraint and the cover. Pay particularattention while resetting the NECK-PRO headrestraints.X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion forward in the direction of arrow:.

X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushiondown as far as it will go in the direction ofarrow;.


X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion back in the direc-tion of arrow= until it engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO head restraint.

i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraintsrequires a lot of strength. If you have difficultyresetting theNECK-PRO head restraints, havethis work carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

Do not insert your finger between the cushion ofthe head restraint and the cover. Pay particularattention while resetting the NECK-PRO luxuryhead restraints.X Remove resetting tool: from the vehicledocument wallet.

X Slide resetting tool: into guide; betweenthe NECK-PRO luxury head restraint and therear cover of the head restraint.

X Push resetting tool: down until you hear thehead restraint deployment mechanismengage.

X Pull out resetting tool:.X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint cushion back in thedirection of arrow= until it engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO luxury head restraint.

X Put resetting tool: back into the vehicledocument wallet.

i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO luxury head restraints, have this workcarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending on thetype and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are loweredRthe electrically adjustable steering wheel israised when the driver's door is openedRthe engine is switched off and the fuel supplyis cut offRvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergencycall

Children in the vehicle

Important safety notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front-passenger seat. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you installa child restraint system on a rear seat. Childrenare generally better protected there.If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.The child restraint system must be appropri-ate to the age, weight and size of the childRbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes in this section in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.

Children in the vehicle 49

Safety

Z

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Always ensure that all vehicle occupants havetheir seat belts fastened correctly and are sittingproperly. Particular attention must be paid tochildren.Observe the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 40) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 41).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where athree-point seat belt can be properly fastenedwithout a booster seat.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot

be immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat belt retractorensures that the seat belt will not slacken oncethe child restraint system has been secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of the belt sashguide.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seat beltretractor is activated.

X Push the child seat restraint system down sothat the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.

Removing a child restraint system and deacti-vating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

X Press release button of belt buckle, hold thebelt tongue firmly and guide it back towardsthe belt sash guide.The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.

Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesYou can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.

50 Children in the vehicleSafety

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system isalways resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.

You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-lines" (Y page 204).

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-

ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.

The securing systems of child restraint systemsare:Rthe seat belt systemRthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsRthe Top Tether anchorages

i If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,always observe the information on "Childrestraint systems on the front-passengerseat" (Y page 54). There you will also findinformation on deactivating the front-passenger front air bag.

All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-responds to the standards can be found on aninstruction label on the child restraint system.This confirmation can also be found in the instal-lation instructions that are included with thechild restraint system.Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-ing system

G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the


Safety

Z

child restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.

Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-lation and operating instructions for the childrestraint system used.Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engagedcorrectly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middleseat does not get trapped. The seat belt couldotherwise be damaged.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystemon both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings:.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems are installed on the left and right of therear seats.Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may alsobe used and can be installed using the vehicle'sseat belt system. Install the child seat accordingto the manufacturer's instructions.

Top Tether

IntroductionTop Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the child restraint system secured witha LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.If the child restraint system is equipped with aTop Tether belt, this should always be used.


G WARNINGIf the rear seat backrests are not locked, theycould fold forwards in the event of an acci-dent, heavy braking or sudden changes ofdirection. As a result, child restraint systemscannot perform their intended protectivefunction. Rear seat backrests that are notlocked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.in the event of an accident. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-ling a Top Tether belt. Adjust the rear seatbackrests so that they are in an upright posi-tion.

Make sure that the backrest in the rear com-partment engages fully. To do so, pull firmly onthe seat backrest.

Top Tether anchorages

Top Tether anchorages; are on the cargocompartment floor.


X Remove cargo compartment cover(Y page 209).

X Move the head restraint up.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystem with Top Tether. Always comply withthe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions when doing so.

X Route Top Tether belt= under the headrestraint between the two head restraint bars.

X Hook Top Tether hook: of Top Tether belt= into Top Tether anchorage;.Make sure that Top Tether belt= is not twis-ted.

X Tension Top Tether belt=. Always complywith the child restraint system manufactur-er's installation instructions when doing so.

X Move head restraint back down again slightlyif necessary (Y page 77). Make sure thatyou do not interferewith the correct routing ofTop Tether belt=.

BabySmart™ air bag deactivation sys-tem

G WARNINGElectronic devices on the front-passengerseat can affect the function of the Baby-Smart™ air bag deactivation system, forexample:RLaptopRMobile phoneRTransponder cards such as ski passes oraccess passes

The front-passenger air bag could deploy acci-dentally or not function as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any of the devices mentionedabove or similar devices on the front-passenger seat. Be aware of the status of thefront-passenger front air bag both before andduring the journey.

The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system'ssensor system in the front-passenger seatdetects whether a special Mercedes-Benz childrestraint system with a transponder for theBabySmart™ air bag deactivation system has

been installed. In this case, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remainslit. The front-passenger front air bag is deacti-vated.When the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock or is in position 0, the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp does not light up.

i If the front-passenger front air bag is deac-tivated by the BabySmart™ air bag deactiva-tion system, the following remain enabled onthe front-passenger side:Rthe side impact air bagRthe pelvis air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Device

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat and thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp isoff, the front-passenger front air bag candeploy in the event of an accident. The childcould be struck by the air bag. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.

G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. It will not be deployed in theevent of an accident and cannot perform itsintended protective function. A person in thefront-passenger seat could then, for example,come into contact with the vehicle's interior,especially if the person is sitting too close tothe dashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Youmay only transport a child on thefront-passenger seat if they are seated in asuitable rearward or forward-facing childrestraint system. Always observe the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions.


Safety

Z

G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, in the event of anaccident, the child could:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off

This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Move the front-passenger seat as far back aspossible. Always make sure that the shoulderbelt strap is correctly routed from the vehiclebelt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide onthe child restraint system. The shoulder beltstrap must be routed forwards and down-wards from the belt sash guide. If necessary,adjust the belt sash guide and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observethe information about suitable positioning ofthe child restraint system in this Operator'sManual as well as the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:shows you whether the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.The system carries out self-diagnostics.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampmust light up for approximately six seconds.

If, after the system self-test, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. It will then not be deployed in theevent of an accident.Ris not lit: the sensor system did not detect achild restraint system with transponder forthe BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system.If, in the event of an accident, all deploymentcriteria are met, the front-passenger front airbag is deployed.

Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat

General notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front-passenger seat. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you installthe child restraint system on a rear seat.If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,always observe the information on the "Baby-Smart™ air bag deactivation system"(Y page 53).You can thus avoid the risks that could arise asa result of:Ra child restraint system that is not detectedby the BabySmart™ air bag deactivation sys-tem sensor systemRthe unintentional deactivation of the front-passenger front air bagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board

Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is permanently lit (Y page 39) is the front-passenger front air bag deactivated.Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.


Forward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the childrestraint system must lie as flat as possibleagainst the backrest of the front-passengerseat. The child restraint system must not touchthe roof or be subjected to a load by the head

restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrestand the head restraint position accordingly.Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap iscorrectly routed from the vehicle belt sash guideto the shoulder belt guide on the child restraintsystem. The shoulder belt strap must be routedforward and down from the vehicle belt sashguide. If necessary, adjust the belt sash guideand the front-passenger seat accordingly.Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.

Problems with the BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampon the center console islit.

A special Mercedes-Benz child restraint systemwith a transponder forthe BabySmart™ air bag deactivation systemhas been installed on thefront-passenger seat. The front-passenger air bag has therefore beendeactivated as desired.

G WARNINGThere is no child restraint system installed on the front-passengerseat. The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system is malfunctioning,for example due to electronic devices on the front-passenger seat.There is a risk of injury.X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, forexample:RLaptopRMobile phoneRCard with a transponder, such as a ski pass or access pass

If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-passenger seat may not be used.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

When you switch theignition on, the 6restraint systemwarninglamp lights up and/orthe PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampdoes not light up briefly.

G WARNINGThe BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system is malfunctioning.Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on asuitable rear seat.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Please also refer to the notes about the restraint system warninglamp (Y page 193).


Safety

Z

Child-proof locks


G WARNINGIf children are traveling in the vehicle, theycould:Ropen doors, thus endangering other peopleor road usersRexit the vehicle and be caught by oncomingtrafficRoperate vehicle equipment and becometrapped

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Always activate the child-proof locks andoverride feature if children are traveling in thevehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always takethe key with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unattended in the vehicle.

Override feature for:Rthe rear doors (Y page 56)Rthe rear side windows (Y page 56)

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.

Child-proof locks for the rear doorsYou secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door securedwith a child-proof lock cannot be opened frominside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked,the door can be opened from the outside.

X To activate: press the child-proof lock leverdown in the direction of arrow;.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks arework-ing properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever up in the direction of arrow:.

Override feature for the rear side win-dows

G WARNINGWhen children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,activate the override switch. Otherwise, thechildren could be injured, e.g. by trappingthemselves in the rear side window.


X To enable/disable: press button:.If indicator lamp; is lit, operation of the rearside windows is disabled. Operation is onlypossible using the switches in the driver'sdoor. If indicator lamp; is off, operation ispossible using the switches in the rear com-partment.

Pets in the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users

Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:

RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 57)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 58)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 58)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 61)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 61)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style or if you areinattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-ther reduce the risk of an accident nor overridethe laws of physics. Driving safety systems aremerely aids designed to assist driving. You areresponsible for maintaining the distance to thevehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking ingood time, and for staying in lane. Always adaptyour driving style to suit the prevailing road andweather conditions andmaintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.The driving safety systems described only workas effectively as possible when there is ade-quate contact between the tires and the roadsurface. Pay particular attention to the informa-tion regarding tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels and tires"section (Y page 251).In wintry driving conditions, always use wintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.Only in this way will the driving safety systemsdescribed in this section work as effectively aspossible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a way thatthe wheels do not lock when you brake. Thisallows you to continue steering the vehiclewhenbraking.The yellow ! ABSwarning lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It goes out when the engine is run-ning.ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when youonly brake gently.

Driving safety systems 57

Safety

Z

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 57).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 190) and dis-play messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 171).

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.

X To make a full brake application: depressthe brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be an indicationof hazardous road conditions, and functions as areminder to take extra care while driving.

Off-road ABSAn ESP® system specifically suited to off-roadterrain is activated automatically once the off-road program is activated.At speeds below 37 mph (60 km/h), the frontwheels lock cyclically during braking. The dig-ging-in effect achieved in the process reducesthe stopping distance on off-road terrain. Thislimits steering capability.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency braking situations.If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BASautomatically boosts the braking force, thusshortening the stopping distance.


G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 57).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.power transmission between the tires and theroad surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating fromthe direction desired by the driver, one or morewheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. Theengine output is also modified to keep the vehi-cle on the desired course within physical limits.ESP® assists the driver when pulling away onwet or slippery roads. ESP® can also stabilizethe vehicle during braking.

58 Driving safety systemsSafety

4ETS (Electronic Traction System)i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 57).

4ETS traction control is part of ESP®.4ETS traction control is no longer active above aspeed of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-red to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.


G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Only operate the vehicle for a maximum often seconds on a brake test dynamometer.Switch off the ignition.Application of the brakes by ESP® may oth-erwise destroy the brake system.

! A function or performance test should onlybe carried out on a two-axle dynamometer.Before you operate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult a qualifiedworkshop. You could otherwise damage thedrive train or the brake system.

If the å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights upcontinuously, ESP® is deactivated.If the ÷ ESP® warning lamp lights up contin-uously, ESP® is not available due to a malfunc-tion.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 191) and display messages which maybe displayed in the instrument cluster(Y page 171).

Only use wheels with the recommended tiresizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.If differential locks are switched on, ABS, BASand ESP® switch off automatically.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP® warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the÷ ESP®warning lampflashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailingroad and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehicle stopsmoving. The engine starts automatically whenthe driver wants to pull away again. ESP®remains in its previously selected status, e.g. ifESP® was deactivated before the engine wasautomatically switched off.

Deactivating/activating ESP®


You can select between the following states ofESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.

Driving safety systems 59

Safety

Z

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-ing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelRoff-roadSpinning the wheels results in a cutting actionwhich provides better grip.Activate ESP® as soon as the situations descri-bed above no longer apply. ESP® will otherwisenot be able to stabilize the vehicle if the vehiclestarts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated. Youcould otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To deactivate: press button: until theåwarning lamp lights up in the instrumentcluster.

X To activate: press button: until the åwarning lamp goes out in the instrument clus-ter.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp in theinstrument cluster flashes. In such situations,ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.REngine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.RTraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

RMercedes-AMG vehicles: and are driving aspeed at above 62mph (100 km/h), ESP® stillintervenes when one wheel reaches its griplimit even though it is deactivated.RAll other models: and are driving at a speedabove 37 mph (60 km/h), ESP® still inter-venes when one wheel reaches its grip limiteven though it is deactivated.

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if ESP® is deactiva-ted, it is reactivated automatically if you aredriving at a speed above 62 mph (100 km/h) oryou exceed a certain lateral acceleration.All other models: if ESP® is deactivated, it isreactivated automatically if you are driving at aspeed above 37mph (60 km/h) or you exceed acertain lateral acceleration.

Trailer stabilization

General informationIf your vehicle/trailer combination begins toswerve, ESP® assists you in this situation. ESP®slows the vehicle down by braking and limitingthe engine output until the vehicle/trailer com-bination has stabilized.

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilization will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity cantip over before ESP® can detect this. There isa risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.

If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com-bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilizethe vehicle/trailer combination by depressingthe brake firmly.Trailer stabilization is active above speeds ofabout 37 mph (60 km/h).ESP® trailer stabilization does not work if ESP®is deactivated or malfunctioning.

60 Driving safety systemsSafety

EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brake pressureon the rear wheels to improve driving stabilitywhile braking.


G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 190) as well as displaymessages (Y page 172).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE provides increased brakingsafety. In addition to the braking function,ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function(Y page 139) and hill start assist (Y page 127).

Protection against theft

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.X To activate: remove the SmartKey from theignition lock.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivated whenyou start the engine.

In the event that the engine cannot be started(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-tem is not operational. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm systemis armed after approximately 15 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart-Key.i If you then do not open a side door or therear door, the alarm system switches back onagain after approximately 40 seconds.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe rear doorRthe hoodThe alarm is also triggered if:Rthe position of the vehicle is changed.Ra window is smashed.The alarm is not switched off, even if you closethe open door that triggered it, for example.

X To stop the alarm: press the% or&button on the SmartKey.The alarm is stopped.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is stopped.

i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-tem automatically notifies the Customer

Protection against theft 61

Safety

Z

Assistance Center. This is done either by textmessage or data connection.The emergency call system sends the mes-sage or data provided that:Ryou have subscribed to thembrace service.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

62 Protection against theftSafety

SmartKey


G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-netic fields. Otherwise, the remote controlfunction could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-ity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phoneor another SmartKey.Rwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.Rinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.This can affect the functionality of the Smart-Key.

A check which periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and the Smart-Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is inthe vehicle. This occurs, for example:Rwhen starting the engineRwhile driving

SmartKey functions

: & Locks the vehicle; % Unlocks the vehicleThe SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe rear doorRthe fuel filler flapX To unlock centrally: press the% button.If you do not open the vehicle within approx-imately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rprotection against theft is reactivated.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.The turn signals flash once when unlocking andthree times when locking.You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 166).You will receive visual and acoustic locking con-firmation if all components were able to belocked.When the surround lighting is activated via theon-board computer, it lights up when it is darkafter the vehicle is unlocked with the SmartKey(Y page 165).

SmartKey 63

Openingandclosing

Z

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the locking sys-tem. This means that only the driver's door andthe fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicleis unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travelalone.X To change the setting: press and hold downthe% and& buttons simultaneouslyfor approximately six seconds until the bat-tery check lamp (Y page 65) flashes twice.

If the setting of the locking system is changedwithin the signal range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicleThe SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door and fuel fillerflap: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the% buttontwice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.X To restore the factory settings: press andhold the% and& buttons simultane-ously for approximately six seconds until thebattery check lamp (Y page 65) flashestwice.

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with theSmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 61).If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-matically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction of thearrow and at the same time remove mechan-ical key; from the SmartKey.

Further information on locking/unlocking thedriver's door (Y page 68).

Inserting the mechanical keyX Push mechanical key; completely into theSmartKey until it engages and releasecatch: is back in its basic position.

SmartKey battery


G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separately

64 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

and recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. National guide-lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thebatteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 65).If the SmartKey battery is checked within thesignal reception range of the vehicle, pressingthe& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 64).

X Press mechanical key; in the direction ofthe arrow into the opening in the SmartKeyuntil battery compartment cover: opens.Do not hold battery compartment cover:closed while doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth todo so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

X Insert the front tabs of battery compartmentcover: into the housing first and then pressto close it.

X Insert mechanical key; into the SmartKey(Y page 64).

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons onthe vehicle.

SmartKey 65

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the SmartKey


You can no longer lock orunlock the vehicle usingthe SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 65) and replace it if necessary(Y page 65).

If this does not work:X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 68).

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 68).

The SmartKey is faulty.X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 68).X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using the Smart-Key.

The on-board voltage is too lowX Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 243).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 243).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost a Smart-Key.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Doors


G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.

Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

66 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insideYou can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can only open therear doors from inside the vehicle if they are notsecured by the child-proof locks (Y page 56). Ifthe vehicle has previously been locked with theSmartKey, opening a door from the inside willtrigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch offthe alarm (Y page 61).Only open the door when the traffic situationpermits.

X Front doors: pull door handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: pops up.The door is unlocked and can be opened.

X Rear doors: pull the locking knob of the reardoor up.The door is unlocked.

X Pull the door handle on the rear door.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle fromthe inside.The central locking button does not lock orunlock the fuel filler flap.The switches are on the driver’s door.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.

The doors can be opened from the inside. Youcan only open the rear doors from inside thevehicle if they are not secured by the child-prooflocks (Y page 56)You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from theinside if the vehicle has been locked with theSmartKey.If a locked door is opened from the inside, theprevious unlock status of the vehicle will betaken into consideration if:Rthe vehicle was locked using the locking but-ton for the central locking, orRlocked automaticallyThe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked, only thedoor which has been opened from the inside isunlocked.

Automatic locking feature

Doors 67

Openingandclosing

Z

X To deactivate: press and hold button: forapproximately five seconds until a tonesounds.

X To activate: press and hold button; forapproximately five seconds until a tonesounds.

If you press one of the two buttons and do nothear a tone, the relevant setting has alreadybeen selected.The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-ing.You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer.You can also switch the automatic locking func-tion on and off using the on-board computer(Y page 166).

Locking/unlocking the driver's doorwith the mechanical key

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of thedriver's door as far as it will go.

X To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise as far as it will go to position1.

X To lock: turn themechanical key clockwise asfar as it will go to position2.

If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm(Y page 61).

Rear door


G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the reardoor is open when the engine is running, par-ticularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaustfumes could enter the passenger compart-ment. There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the reardoor. Never drive with the rear door open.

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

! The tailgate swings out to the side whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance.

Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com-partment. Otherwise, you could lock yourselfout.You should preferably place luggage or loads inthe cargo compartment. Observe the loadingguidelines (Y page 204).

OpeningThe tailgate must be unlocked before it can beopened.X Press the% button on the SmartKey.

68 Rear doorOp

eningandclosing

X Press release button: and pull door han-dle;.

X Open the rear door.

ClosingX Push the tailgate closed from outside thevehicle.

X Lock the vehicle with the& button on theSmartKey.

Side windows


G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.Activate the override feature for the rear sidewindows. When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-cle. Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle.

Opening and closing the side win-dowsThe switches for all side windows are located onthe driver's door. There is also a switch on eachdoor for the corresponding side window.The switches on the driver's door take prece-dence.

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftX Turn the SmartKey to position1 or2 in theignition lock.

X To open manually: press and hold the cor-responding switch.

X To open automatically: press the corre-sponding switch beyond the point of resist-ance and release it.Automatic operation is started.

X To interrupt automatic operation: press/pull the corresponding switch again.

X To close manually: pull the correspondingswitch and hold it.

You can continue to operate the side windowsafter you switch off the engine or remove the

Side windows 69

Openingandclosing

Z

SmartKey. This function remains active for fiveminutes or until you open a front door.The side windows cannot be operated from therear when the override feature for the side win-dows is activated (Y page 56).

Convenience openingi The convenience opening feature can onlybe operated using the SmartKey. The Smart-Keymust be close to the driver's door handle.

You can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to carryout the following functions simultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the sliding sunroofRswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver'sand front-passenger seat

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Press and hold the% button on the Smart-Key until the side windows and the slidingsunroof are in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening: releasethe% button.

Convenience closing feature


G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trapped

in the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.

Operationi The "convenience closing feature" can onlybe operated using the SmartKey. The Smart-Keymust be close to the driver's door handle.

When you lock the vehicle, you can simultane-ously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the sliding sunroofX Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Press and hold the& button on the Smart-Key until the side windows and the slidingsunroof are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the side windows and thesliding sunroof are closed.

X To interrupt convenience closing: releasethe& button.

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGClosing the side windows with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature could leadto serious or even fatal injury. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the sidewindows.

70 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing


A side window cannot beclosed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannot beclosed and you cannotsee the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switchagain until the side window has closed.

If a side window will still not open or close due to a malfunction, consult a qualified specialistworkshop.

Sliding sunroof


G WARNINGWhile opening and closing the sliding sunroof,body parts in close proximity could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the opening and closing pro-cedures.If somebody becomes trapped:Rrelease the switch immediately, orRduring automatic operation, push theswitch briefly in any direction

The opening or closing procedure will be stop-ped.

G WARNINGIf children operate the sliding sunroof theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free ofsnow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions mayoccur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could bedamaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid-ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi-cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged ifwater enters the vehicle interior.

Resonance noises can occur in addition to theusual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof isopen. They are caused by minor pressure fluc-tuations in the vehicle interior. Change the posi-tion of the sliding sunroof or open a side windowslightly to reduce or eliminate these noises.

Sliding sunroof 71

Openingandclosing

Z

Opening and closing the sliding sun-roof

: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the SmartKey to position1 or2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the¡ switch in the corre-sponding direction.

X To open automatically: press the¡ switch briefly beyond the point of resist-ance in the direction of arrow;.The sliding sunroof opens completely.

X To interrupt automatic operation: press orpull the¡ switch again.

Automatic operation for opening or raising isonly availablewhen the sliding sunroof is closed.

i The sliding sunroof cannot be raised when aroof rack is installed.

Operating the sliding sunroof man-uallyThe actuator motor for the sliding sunroof islocated on the left-hand side of the cargo com-partment, behind the rear panel trim.

Removing the rear panel trimX Open the rear door.X Remove edge protection: on door pillar inthe direction of arrow;.

X Pull rear panel trim= in the direction ofarrow? as far as necessary, so that theelectrical connections can be reached.

X Disconnect the electrical connections.X Completely remove rear panel trim=.

Opening/closing the sliding sunroof manuallyX Remove lug wrenchA from the vehicle toolkit (Y page 239).

X Place lug wrenchA onto the hexagon nut ofthe actuator motor.

X To open: turn lug wrenchA counter-clock-wise.

X To close: turn lug wrenchA clockwise.

Installing the rear panel trimX Connect the electrical connections.X Insert rear panel trim=.Hook tabsC of rear panel trim= into vehi-cle side wallB.

X Insert edge protection:.X Close the rear door.

72 Sliding sunroofOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNINGYou could be severely or even fatally injured when closing the sliding sunroof with increasedclosing force or if the anti-entrapment feature is deactivated. Make sure that nobody can becometrapped when closing the sliding sunroof.


The sliding sunroof can-not be closed and youcannot see the cause.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the¡ switch down again to thepoint of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and thenreopens slightly:X Immediately after it blocks, pull the¡ switch down again to thepoint of resistance until the sliding sunroof is closed.

If the sliding sunroof will still not open or close due to a malfunction, consult a qualified specialistworkshop.

Sliding sunroof 73

Openingandclosing

Z

Correct driver's seat position

: Steering wheel; Seat belts= BackrestX Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjust-ment (Y page 74).

X Make sure that seat= is adjusted properly.Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 76)

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag aspossibleRyou are sitting in a normal upright positionRyou can fasten the seat belt properlyRyou have moved the backrest to an almostvertical positionRyou have set the seat cushion angle so thatyour thighs are gently supportedRyou can depress the pedals properlyX Check whether the head restraint is adjustedproperly (Y page 76).When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the back ofyour head is supported at eye level by thecenter of the head restraint.

X Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 74).

X Make sure that steering wheel: is adjustedproperly.Adjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 80).

When adjusting the steering wheel, make surethat:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bentRyou can move your legs freelyRyou can see all the displays in the instrumentcluster clearly

X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 40).

X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 41).

The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of your shoulderRbe routed across your hips in the pelvic areaX Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmirrorand the exteriormirrors in such away that youhave a good view of road and traffic condi-tions (Y page 81).

X Vehicles with a memory function: save theseat, steering wheel and exterior mirror set-tings with the memory function (Y page 83).

Seats


G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The seats can still be adjusted when there is noSmartKey in the ignition lock.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 43) and "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 49).

74 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Make sure that you do not rotate the headrestraints of the front and rear seats whenadjusting the head restraints. Otherwise, youcannot adjust the height and angle of the headrestraints correctly.Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close aspossible to your head.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seat adjust-ment buttons and become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get under thelever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-tem.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.

Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seat heat-ing should also not be used to dry the seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see "Interior care".Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.Do not place sharp objects on the seatcushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. Theseats should only be occupied by passen-gers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating materi-als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmov-ing the seats back. There is a risk that theseats and/or the objects could be damaged.

! When the rear bench seat is folded for-wards, the front seats cannot be moved totheir rearmost position. You could otherwisedamage the seats and the rear bench seat.

! Make sure that the sun visor is folded upbefore adjusting the backrest and headrestraint height. The head restraint and sunvisor could otherwise collide when the headrestraint is fully extended.

i If the front door is open, the seats can beadjusted for up to 30 minutes after the igni-tion has been switched off.

i The rear-compartment head restraints canbe removed (Y page 77).For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

i You can find further information aboutenlarging the cargo compartment (folding therear bench seat forwards) on (Y page 208).

Seats 75

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the seats electrically! Make sure that the cup holder on the centerconsole is folded down before you move thefront-passenger seat forwards.

: Head restraint height; Seat height= Seat cushion angle? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 83).

Adjusting the head restraints


G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Observe the following when adjusting the headrestraints:X Do not rotate the head restraints of the frontand rear seats.Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height andangle of the head restraints correctly.

X Adjust the head restraint so that it is as closeas possible to your head.

Adjusting the front seat head restraintheight

: Head restraint height; Seat height= Seat cushion angle? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angleX Slide head restraint adjustment button: upor down in the direction of the arrow.

Adjusting the luxury head restraints

X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right and/or left-handside bolster: into the desired position.

X To adjust the angle of the head restraint:push or pull the head restraint in the directionof arrow;.

Resetting the front seat head restraintsIt is necessary to reset the front seat headrestraints after the voltage supply has beeninterrupted, e.g. if the battery has been com-pletely discharged or disconnected.


gwheelandmirrors

X Make sure that the cup holder on the centerconsole is folded down (Y page 210).

X Move the seat as far forward as possible andthe head restraint in as far as possible.

Rear seat head restraints

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.

Observe the following when adjusting the headrestraints:X Do not rotate the head restraints of the frontand rear seats.Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height andangle of the head restraints correctly.

X Adjust the head restraint so that it is as closeas possible to your head.

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight

X Once the head restraint is fully lowered, pressrelease catch:.

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.

Installing/removing the rear seat headrestraintsX To remove: pull the head restraint up to thestop.

X Press release catch: and pull the headrestraint out of the guides.

X To re-install: place the head restraint in theguides of the backrest.i The notches on the guide rodmust be on theleft-hand side when viewed in the direction oftravel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hear itengage in position.

Adjusting the multicontour seat

: To adjust the thigh cushion; To adjust the backrest contour in the lumbar

region= To adjust the backrest contour in the upper

back region? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat back-

restYou can adjust the contour of the front seatsindividually so as to provide optimum supportfor your back and sides.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 104).

Seats 77

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimum sup-port for your back.

: Raises the backrest contour; Softens the backrest contour= Lowers the backrest contour? Hardens the backrest contour

Switching the seat heating on/off

General notes

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

The red indicator lamps in the button indicatethe heating level you have selected.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2in the ignition lock.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.One or more of the indicator lamps in the seatheating button are flashing.

Switching the front-seat heating on/off

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.i The system automatically switches fromlevel 3 to level 2 after approximately eightminutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 35 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.

Switching the rear-seat heating on/off

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.i The system automatically switches fromlevel 3 to level 2 after approximately eightminutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.


gwheelandmirrors

The system automatically switches offapproximately 35 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Switching on/off

Seat ventilation is only available for the frontseats.The three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you have selected.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 104).

X To switch on:press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired ventilation level is set.i If you open the side windows and the slidingsunroof using the SmartKey (Y page 70), thedriver's seat ventilation automaticallyswitches to the highest level.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

Problems with the seat heating/seat ventilation


The seat heating or seatventilation has switchedoff prematurely or can-not be switched on.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-ers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as therear window defroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seatventilation can be switched back on manually.

Steering wheel


G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.

G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

The electrically adjustable steering wheel canstill be adjusted when there is no SmartKey inthe ignition lock.

Steering wheel 79

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the steering wheel

: Adjusts the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment)

; Adjusts the steering wheel height

i If the driver's door is open, the steeringwheel can be adjusted for up to 30 minutesafter the ignition has been switched off.

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 80)RStoring settings (Y page 83)

Steering wheel heating

Switching on/off

: To switch on the steering wheel heating; To switch off the steering wheel heating= Indicator lampThe steering wheel heating warms the leatherareas on the steering wheel.X To switchon:make sure that the SmartKey isin position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the lever in the direction of arrow:.Indicator lamp= lights up.

X To switch off: make sure that the SmartKeyis in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the lever in the direction of arrow;.Indicator lamp= goes out.

i The steering wheel heating does not switchoff automatically.

i The steering wheel heating may switch offtemporarily if:Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior isabove 86 ‡ (30 †)Rthe temperature of the steering wheel isabove 95 ‡ (35 †)

Indicator lamp= remains on.

i The steering wheel heating is deactivated ifyou remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

Problems with the steering wheel heat-ingIf steering wheel heating indicator lamp= isflashing, the steering wheel heating hasswitched off automatically. The vehicle's elec-trical system voltage is too low because toomany electrical consumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you donot need, such as the rear window defrosteror interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, thesteering wheel heating will switch back onautomatically.

Steeringwheel EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture


G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel and the driver's seat, youand other vehicle occupants – particularlychildren – could become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the seat andthe steering wheel.

80 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRpress one of the memory function memorybuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving

The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

! Do not activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture, if the seat backrest is reclined too farbackwards. This can damage the front or rearseats. You must first move the backrest to avertical position.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting inand out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer(Y page 166).

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel moves upwards and towardsthe dashboard if:Ryou remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock orRyou open the driver's door and the SmartKeyis in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock

i The steering wheel only moves upwards andtowards the dashboard if it has not alreadyreached the upper steering limiter.

Position of the steering wheel for driv-ingThe steering wheel is moved to the last selectedposition when:Rthe driver's door is closedRyou insert the SmartKey into the ignition lockThe last position of the steering column is storedwhen you switch off the ignition or when youstore the setting with the memory function(Y page 83).

Mirrors

Rear-view mirrorX Adjust the rear-view mirror in such a way thatyou have a good view of road and traffic con-ditions behind you.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

Mirrors 81

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 104).

X Press button: to select the left-hand exte-rior mirror

orX Press button; to select the right-hand exte-rior mirror.

X Press button= up, down, or to the left orright until you have adjusted the exterior mir-ror to the correct position. You should have agood overview of traffic conditions.

i The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.

i The exterior mirrors are heated automati-cally if the rear window defroster is switchedon and the outside temperature is low.

Folding the exteriormirrors in/out elec-trically

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 104).

X Briefly press:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than 9 mph(15 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-rior mirrors.

Resetting the exterior mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must bereset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise notfold in when you select the "Fold inmirrors whenlocking" function in the on-board computer(Y page 167).X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1in the ignition lock (Y page 104).

X Briefly press:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in/outautomaticallyIf the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 167):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automati-cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle andthen open the driver's or front-passengerdoor.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionX Press button: repeatedly until you hear themirror engage in position.The mirror housing is engaged again and youcan adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 81).

82 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Automatic anti-glare mirrorsThe rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror onthe driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-sor in the rear-view mirror

i The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interior light-ing is switched on.

Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side

Setting/storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

: Left-hand exterior mirror; Right-hand exterior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory buttonYou can position the front-passenger side exte-rior mirror in such a way that you can see therear wheel on that side as soon as you engagereverse gear. You can store this position.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 104).

X Press button; for the exterior mirror on thefront-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust the exte-rior mirror to a position that allows you to seethe rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.

i If you shift the transmission to another posi-tion, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving position.

Using the memory buttonYou can position the front-passenger side exte-rior mirror in such a way that you can see therear wheel on that side as soon as you engagereverse gear. This setting can be stored usingmemory button M?.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 104).

X With the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side activated, use adjustmentbutton= to adjust the exterior mirror. In theexterior mirror, the rear wheel and the curbshould be visible.

X Press memory button M? and one of thearrows on adjustment button= within threeseconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat thesteps.

Calling up a stored parking position set-tingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 104).

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button;.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger sidemoves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rif you press button: for the exterior mirroron the driver's side

Memory functions

Storing settings

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control of

Memory functions 83

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

the vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

With the memory function, you can store up tothree different settings, e.g. for three differentpeople.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRdriver's side: steering wheel positionRdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrorson the driver's and front-passenger sides

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2(Y page 104) or that the respective door isopen.

X Adjust the seat (Y page 76) and head restraint(Y page 76).

X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel(Y page 80) and the exterior mirrors(Y page 81).

X Press memory button M.X Press one of memory buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selected stor-age position.

Calling up a stored setting! If you want to move the seat from the fullyreclined position to a stored seat position,first raise the backrest using the seat switch.The seat could otherwise be damaged.

X Press and hold the relevant memory button 1,2 or 3, until the seat, head restraints, steeringwheel and mirrors are in the stored position.i The setting procedure is interrupted as soonas you release the memory button.

84 Memory functionsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Exterior lighting

General notesUSA only: if you wish to drive during the daytimewithout lights, switch off the Daytime Run‐ning Lights function via the on-board com-puter (Y page 165).

Light switch

Operation

1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlampmode, controlledby the light sensor

5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch to theÃ position.The exterior lighting, except the parking lamps/standing lamps, switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inpositionu

Low-beam headlamps

G WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or other

causes of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

Even if the light sensor does not detect that it isdark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-lamps switch onwhen the ignition is switched onand the light switch is set to the L position.This is a particularly useful function in the eventof rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni-tion lock or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to the L position.The green L indicator lamp on the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Daytime running lamps

Daytime running lamps in CanadaThe daytime running lamps function is requiredby law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deac-tivated.X Turn the light switch to theÃ position.With the engine running: depending on theambient light, the daytime running lamps orthe low-beam headlamps are switched on.When the low-beam headlamps are switchedon, the green L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if you shift the automatic transmis-sion from a driving position to position P, thedaytime running lamps or low-beam headlampsgo out after three minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-tionary and the ambient light is good: if you turnthe light switch to the T position, the day-time running lamps and parking lamps areswitched on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to theL position, themanual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

Daytime running lamps in the USAIn the USA, the daytime running lamps are deac-tivated upon delivery from the factory.

Exterior lighting 85

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X To switch on the daytime running lamps:switch on the Daytime Running Lightsfunction via the on-board computer(Y page 165).

X Turn the light switch to theÃ position.With the engine running: depending on theambient light, the daytime running lamps orthe low-beam headlamps are switched on.When the low-beam headlamps are switchedon, the green L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to the T or L position, the manualsettings take precedence over the daytime run-ning lamps.

Automatic headlamp mode

G WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-ing at all times.Ã is the favored light switch setting.The light setting is automatically selectedaccording to the brightness of the ambient light,but not in the event of poor visibility due toweather conditions such as fog, snow or spray.X To switch on the automatic headlamps:turn the light switch to theÃ position.With the SmartKey in position1 in the igni-tion lock, the parking lamps are switched onor off automatically depending on the bright-ness of the ambient light.If you have switched on the Daytime Run‐ning Lights function via the on-board com-puter, the daytime running lamps or the park-ing lamps and low-beam headlamps willswitch on or off automatically while theengine is running.When the low-beam headlamps are switchedon, the green L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

Rear fog lampThe rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thickfog. You must observe the legal requirementsfor the country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the rear fog lamp.X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn theSmartKey in the ignition lock to position2 orstart the engine.

X Turn the light switch to the L orÃposition.

X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp on the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Parking lamps! If the battery charge is very low, the parkinglamps or standing lamps are automaticallyswitched off to enable the next engine start.Always park your vehicle safely and in awell litarea, in accordance with the relevant legalstipulations. Avoid using the T parkinglamps over a period of several hours. If pos-sible, switch on the right-hand X or left-hand W standing lamps.

X To switch on: turn the light switch to theT position.The green T indicator lamp on the instru-ment cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.X To switch on the standing lamp: turn theSmartKey to positionu in the ignition lock orremove the SmartKey.

X Turn the light switch to the W (left-handside of the vehicle) orX (right-hand side ofthe vehicle) position.

Headlamp cleaning systemThe headlamps are cleaned automatically if the"Wipe with washer fluid" function is operatedten times while the lights are on and the engineis running (Y page 92). When you switch off

86 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaningsystem is reset and counting is resumed from 0.

Combination switch

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the direction ofarrow; or?.

X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:turn the light switch to the L orÃposition.

X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theÃ position, the high-beam head-lamps are switched on onlywhen it is dark andthe engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp on the instru-ment cluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:move the combination switch back to its nor-mal position.The blue K indicator lamp on the instru-ment cluster goes out.

X High-beam flasher: pull the combinationswitch in the direction of arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch the hazard warning lamps on/off: press button:.The turn signal lamps flash when the hazardwarning lamps are switched on. If you nowswitch on a turn signal lamp using the com-bination switch, only the turn signal lamp onthe corresponding side of the vehicle willflash.

The hazard warning lamps automatically switchon if:Ran air bag is deployed orRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig-gered, orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speedof above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to astandstill

The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli-cation.The hazard warning lamps still operate if theignition is switched off.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideCertain climatic and physical conditions maycause moisture to form in the headlamp. Thismoisture does not affect the functionality of theheadlamp.

Exterior lighting 87


Z

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel

: p Switches the left-hand front readinglamp on/off

; t Switches the cargo compartmentlamp/rear compartment lighting on/off

= p Switches the right-hand front readinglamp on/off

? | Switches the front interior lighting/automatic interior lighting control off

A Switches the automatic interior lighting con-trol on

B c Switches the front interior lighting on

Rear-compartment overhead controlpanel

: p Switches the right-hand reading lampon/off

; p Switches the left-hand reading lampon/off

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeexcept for when the SmartKey is in position2in the ignition lock.The brightness of the instrument cluster lightingmay be set using the controller on the instru-ment cluster (Y page 157).

Automatic interior lighting controlX To switch on: move switchB to the centerposition (Y page 88).

The interior lighting automatically switches on ifyou:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockX To switch off: press the | symbol onswitchB (Y page 88).

The interior lighting remains switched off even ifyou:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock. You can activate this delayed switch-offusing the on-board computer (Y page 166).When a front door is opened, the front interiorlighting comes on. When a rear door is opened,the rear interior lights comes on. In addition, thecourtesy lights come on.

i If a door remains open and the SmartKey isnot in the ignition lock, the interior lightingswitches off after a short while.

Replacing bulbs


G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can getan electric shock if you remove the cover of

88 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con-tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electrical con-tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work onthe Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

Do not use a bulb if it has been dropped or if itsglass tube has been scratched.The bulb may explode if:Ryou touch itRit is hotRyou drop itRyou scratch itUse bulbs only in closed lamps that have beendesigned for this purpose. Only install sparebulbs of the same type and the specified volt-age.Marks on the glass tube reduce the service lifeof the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube withyour bare hands. If necessary, clean the glasstube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub itoff with a lint-free cloth.Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.Do not allow bulbs to come into contact withliquids.Xenon bulbs and LED modules: in addition tothe Xenon bulbs, there are LED modules whichyou cannot change yourself.Have the following bulbs replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop:RHigh-mounted brake lampRAdditional turn signals in the exterior mirrorsRHigh-beam/low-beam headlamps (Xenonheadlamps)RDaytime running lampsRLicense plate lampRParking lamps/standing lampsRSide marker lamps

i Individual segments of the license platelamp LEDsmay fail without a displaymessageappearing in the multifunction display. Regu-larly check the license plate lamp. If neces-sary, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You can replace the following bulbs:RTurn signal lamp (front)RBrake/tail lampRTurn signal lamp (rear)RTail lamps/standing lampsRBackup lampRRear fog lampReplace only the bulbs listed (Y page 89).Have the bulbs that you cannot change yourselfreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.If the new bulb still does not light up, consult aqualified specialist workshop.Headlamps and lights are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times. Havethe headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview of bulb types

Front bulbsYou can replace the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

: Turn signal lamp: 1156 NA

Rear bulbsYou can replace the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

Replacing bulbs 89


Z

: Tail lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W; Brake lamp/tail lamp: P 21/5 W= Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W? Backup lamp: P 21 WA Rear fog lamp: P 21 W

Replacing front bulbs

Turn signals! Make sure that the protective grille does nothit any painted surfaces.You could otherwise damage the paintwork.

! Do not fasten the screws too tightly. Youcould otherwise damage the lens.

X Switch off the lights.X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: pull protectivegrille: out of mounting; in the direction ofthe arrow and swing up.

X Unscrew screws=.X Remove lens?.

X Turn bulbA counter-clockwise, applyingslight pressure, and pull it out of the bulbholder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and,applying slight pressure, turn it clockwiseuntil it engages.

X Install lens?.X Replace and tighten screws=.X Mercedes-AMG vehicles: fold down protec-tive grille: and engage it in mounting;.

Replacing rear bulbs

Protective grille (Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles)! Make sure that the protective grille does nothit any painted surfaces.You could otherwise damage the paintwork.

90 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: you must removethe protective grille before you can replace thebulbs in the tail lamps.X Unscrew screws;.X Swing protective grille: to the right.X After you have replaced the bulbs, swing pro-tective grille: to the left.

X Replace and tighten screws;.

Tail lamps! When installing the lens, make sure that theseal is positioned correctly.

! Do not fasten the screws too tightly. Youcould otherwise damage the lens.

X Switch off the lights.X Unscrew screws:.X Remove lens;.

= Turn signals? Brake/tail lampA Tail lamps/standing lampsX Turn the respective bulb counter-clockwise,applying slight pressure, and pull it out of thebulb holder.


X Install lens;.X Tighten screws:.X Mercedes-AMGvehicles: secure the protec-tive grille (Y page 90).

Backup lamp/rear fog lamp! Do not fasten the screws too tightly. Youcould otherwise damage the lens.

X Switch off the lights.X Unscrew screws:.X Remove lens;.

Replacing bulbs 91


Z

X Turn bulb= counter-clockwise, applyingslight pressure, and pull it out of the bulbholder.


X Install lens;.X Tighten screws:.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wipers whenthe windshield is dry, as this could damagethe wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-lected on the windshield/rear window canscratch the glass if wiping takes place whenthe windshield/rear window is dry.If it is necessary to switch on the windshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, always usewasher fluid when operating the windshieldwipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears on thewindshield/rear window after the vehicle hasbeen washed in an automatic car wash, thismay be due to wax or other residue. Clean thewindshield/rear window with washer fluidafter an automatic car wash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due tooptical influences and the windshield becom-ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.This could then damage the windshield wiperblades or scratch the windshield.For this reason, you should always switch offthe windshield wipers in dry weather.

1 $ Windshield wipers off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, normal3 Å Intermittent wipe, frequent4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe

î Wipes with washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automatically accordingto the intensity of the rain. In the Å position,the rain sensor is more sensitive than in theÄ position, causing the windshield wiper towipe more frequently.Intermittent wiping is interrupted if you stop thevehicle and open a front door. This protectspeople getting into and out of the vehicle frombeing sprayed with water.Intermittent wiping continueswhen all doors areclosed and:Ryou shift the automatic transmission to driveposition D or reverse gear RorRyou change the wiper setting on the combi-nation switch

92 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

: è Switch2 b Wipes with washer fluid3 I Switches on intermittent wiping4 0 Switches off intermittent wiping5 b Wipes with washer fluidX Turn the SmartKey to position1 or2 in theignition lock.

X Turn switch: on the combination switch tothe corresponding position.When the rear window wiper is switched on,the icon appears in the instrument cluster.

The rear window wiper comes on automaticallyif you shift the automatic transmission to posi-tionk while the windshield wipers are on.

Replacing the wiper blades


G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, makesure that you touch only the wiper arm of thewiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.

Never fold a windshield wiper arm without awiper blade back onto the windshield/rearwindow.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you release thewindshield wiper arm without a wiper bladeand it falls onto thewindshield, thewindshieldmay be damaged by the force of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Removing the wiper blades

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Fold wiper arm: away from the windshielduntil it engages.

X Position wiper blade; horizontally.X Press locking spring?.X Slide wiper blade;with hinge piece= fromwiper arm:.

Installing the wiper blade

X Slide wiper arm: into new wiper blade;with hinge piece=.

X Engage spring clip? into the end of thewiperarm.

Windshield wipers 93


Z

X Make sure that wiper blade; is seated cor-rectly.

X Fold wiper arm: back onto the windshield.

Problems with the windshield wipers


The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, are obstructing windshield wiper move-ment. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-shop.

The windshield washerfluid from the spray noz-zles no longer hits thecenter of the windshield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialist workshop.

94 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Overview of the climate control sys-tem

General notesObserve the settings recommended on the fol-lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fogup.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode only brieflyRswitch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-tion functionRactivate the "Windshield defrosting" functionbriefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperature andthe humidity in the vehicle interior and filtersundesirable substances out of the air.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionis only available when the engine is running.Optimum operation is only achieved when thesidewindows and the sliding sunroof are closed.

The climatic comfort deteriorateswhilst the slid-ing sunroof is open. Set the temperature man-ually if the sliding sunroof is open.The residual heat function can only be activatedor deactivated with the ignition switched off(Y page 101).The integrated filter can filter out most particlesof dust and completely filters out pollen. A clog-ged filter reduces the amount of air supplied tothe vehicle interior. Depending on the operatingconditions and environmental influences, theinterval for replacing the filter may be shorterthan specified.

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period duringwarm weather, e.g. using the convenienceopening feature (Y page 70). This will speedup the cooling process and the desired vehi-cle interior temperature will be reached morequickly.

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Control panel (Canada only): Sets the temperature, left (Y page 98); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 99)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 99)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 97)

Switches the residual heat on/off (Y page 101)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 100)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 98)

Overview of the climate control system 95

Climatecontrol

C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 101)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 98)E Increases the airflow (Y page 98)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 98)G Switches the climate control on/off (Y page 97)H DisplayI Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 98)

Control panel (USA only): Sets the temperature, left (Y page 98); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 99)= Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on/off (Y page 99)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 97)

Switches the residual heat on/off (Y page 101)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 100)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 98)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 101)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 98)E Increases the airflow (Y page 98)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 98)G Switches the climate control on/off (Y page 97)H DisplayI Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 98)

Optimum use of dual-zone climatecontrol

Optimum use of the automatic climatecontrolThe following contains notes and recommenda-tions on optimum use of dual-zone climate con-trol.

RYou can switch on climate control by using theÃ and¿ orÃ andÁ buttons.The indicator lamps in theÃ and¿ orÃ andÁ buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).

96 Overview of the climate control systemClimatecontrol

ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" functionbriefly until the windshield is clear again.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. ifthere are unpleasant outside odors or when ina tunnel. Thewindows could otherwise fog up,since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle inair-recirculation mode.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the climatecontrol system only operates at a reduced capa-city. If you require the full climate control output,you can switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button (Y page 106).

Operating the climate control system

Activates/deactivates climate con-trol

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, the airsupply and air circulation are also switched off.

The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch offclimate control only briefly.Activate climate control primarily using theÃ button (Y page 98).

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 104).

X To activate: press theÃ button.The indicator lamp in theÃ button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set to auto-matic mode.

X To deactivate: press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button lightsup.

Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will notbe cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up morequickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running.The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normaland not a sign that there is a malfunction.

Activating/deactivatingX To activate: press theÁ button.The indicator lamp in theÁ button lights up.

X To deactivate: press theÁ button.The indicator lamp in theÁ button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionhas a delayed switch-off feature.

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function! If the cooling with air dehumidification does not switch on, it is possible that the climate controlsystem has lost coolant.Have the cooling with air dehumidification checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Operating the climate control system 97

Climatecontrol


The indicator lamp in the¿ orÁ buttonflashes three times orremains off. The "Cool-ing with air dehumidifi-cation" function cannotbe switched on.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-function.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIn automaticmode, the set temperature ismain-tained at a constant level. The system automat-ically regulates the temperature of the dis-pensed air, the airflow and the air distribution.Automatic mode works best when cooling withair dehumidification is also activated. If neces-sary, cooling with air dehumidification can bedeactivated.

Automatic controlX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 104).

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press theÃ button.The indicator lamp in theÃ button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airflow areactivated.

X To deactivate: press the_ button.orX Press theI orK button.The indicator lamp in theÃ button goesout.

X To switch to manual mode:press the_button.

Setting the temperatureDifferent temperatures can be set for the driv-er's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 104).

X Adjust control: orB (Y page 95) to thedesired temperature.Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settingsP Directs air through the center and side air

ventsO Directs air through the footwell air ventsS Directs air through the center, side and

footwell vents¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsb Canada only: directs the airflow through

the defroster, center and side air vents.a Directs air through the defroster and

footwell vents_ Canada only: directs the airflow through

the defroster, center and footwell airvents.

SettingX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 104).

X Press the_ button repeatedly until thedesired symbol appears in the display.

Setting the airflowX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 104).

X To increase: press theK button.X To reduce: press theI button.

i The airflow from the rear-compartmentvents and the center vents is the same.

98 Operating the climate control systemClimatecontrol

Switching the ZONE function on/offX To switch on: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button lightsup.The temperature setting for the driver's sideis not adopted for the front-passenger sideand the rear compartment. The temperaturefor the front-passenger side and the rear com-partment is set separately.

X To switch off: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout.The temperature setting for the driver's sideis adopted for the front-passenger side andthe rear compartment.

Defrosting the windshield

General notesYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to defrost the inside of the windshieldand the side windows.Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" functionas soon as the windshield is clear again.


X To activate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rcooling with air dehumidification onRhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield and frontside windowsRair-recirculation mode off

X To deactivate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. The cooling with air dehumidifica-tion function remains on. Air-recirculationmode remains deactivated.

Activating/deactivating MAX COOLmaximum coolingTheMAX COOL function is only available in vehi-cles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when the engineis running.X To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To deactivate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in theÙ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

When you activate MAX COOL, the followingfunctions are also switched on:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate theÁ cooling with air dehumidi-fication function.

X Activate theÃ automatic mode.X If thewindows continue to fog up, activate the"Windshield defrosting" function (Y page 99).

i You should only select this setting until thewindshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Switch on the windshield wipers (Y page 92).X Press the_ button repeatedly until theP orO symbol appears in the display.

i You should only select this setting until thewindshield is clear again.

i If you clean the windows regularly, they donot fog up so quickly.

Activating/deactivating windshieldheating

G WARNINGAny accumulation of snow and ice should beremoved from the windshield before driving.

Operating the climate control system 99

Climatecontrol

Z

Otherwise, your vision may be impaired,which could endanger you or others.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 104).

X To activate: press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up.

X To deactivate: press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out.

At outside temperatures above 50 ‡ (10†) thewindshield heating cannot be activated. Indica-tor lamp: lights up briefly when you attempt toactivate it and then goes out again.The windshield defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off as soonas the windshield is clear. Otherwise the wind-shield heating switches off automatically after10 minutes.

When the windshield heating is switched on forthe fourth time in a row, it switches off auto-matically after 5 minutes.Indicator lamp: flashes if too many electricalconsumers are switched on at the same timewhen the battery voltage is low. After approx-imately 30 seconds the windshield heatingswitches off automatically.

Switching the rear window defrosteron/off

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off as soonas the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rearwindow defroster switches off automaticallyafter several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rear windowdefroster may switch off.


X Press the¤ button.The indicator lamp in the¤ button lightsup or goes out.

Problems with the rear window defroster


The indicator lamp in the¤ button flashes.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,interior lighting or the seat heating.

The rear windowdefroster has deactiva-ted prematurely or can-not be activated.

The battery has not been sufficiently charged.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,interior lighting or the seat heating.

100 Operating the climate control systemClimatecontrol

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off

General notesIf you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win-dows can fog up more quickly, in particular atlow temperatures. Only use air-recirculationmode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-ging up.


X To activate: press thed button.The indicator lamp in thed button lightsup.i Air-recirculation mode is automatically acti-vated at high levels of pollution or at high out-side temperatures. When air-recirculationmode is activated automatically, the indicatorlamp in thed button is not lit.Outside air is added after about 30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press thed button.The indicator lamp in thed button goesout.i Air-recirculation mode switches off auto-matically:Rafter approximately five minutes at outsidetemperatures below approximately 41 ‡Rafter approximately five minutes if coolingwith air dehumidification is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at outsidetemperatures above approximately 41 ‡(5 †)

Switching the residual heat on or off

General notesThe residual heat function is only available onvehicles for Canada.It is possible to make use of the residual heat ofthe engine to continue heating the stationaryvehicle for up to 30minutes after the engine hasbeen switched off. The heating time depends onthe set interior temperature.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to positiong in the igni-tion lock (Y page 104) or remove it.

X To activate: press theÁ button.The indicator lamp in theÁ button lightsup.i The blowerwill run at a low speed regardlessof the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat function athigh temperatures, only the ventilation will beactivated.

X To deactivate: press theÁ button.The indicator lamp in theÁ button goesout.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage dropsRif the coolant temperature is too low

Air vents


G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshield andthe hood free of blockages, such as ice, snowor leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles inthe vehicle interior.

i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust thesliders of the air vents to the center position.

i If the automatic climate control constantlydiffers from the set temperature or if unde-

Air vents 101

Climatecontrol

Z

sired drafts are noticeable, proceed as fol-lows:X Open the side air ventsX Open the center air ventsX Open the rear air ventsX Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).The automatic climate control adjusts tothe set temperature.

Setting the air ventsAir vents are located:Ron the left and right-hand side of the dash-boardRin the middle of the dashboardRin the rear-compartment center console

Side air vents: Side window defroster vent; Adjustable side air vent= Thumbwheel for side air ventX To open or close: turn control= to the leftor right.

Adjusting the rear air vents (see the DigitalOperator's Manual).

102 Air ventsClimatecontrol

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesThe sensor system of some driving and drivingsafety systems adjusts automatically while acertain distance is being driven after the vehiclehas been delivered or after repairs. Full systemeffectiveness is not reached until the end of thisteach-in procedure.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with its per-formance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicleand engine speeds for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,during this period.RWhen shifting gearsmanually, shift up in goodtime, before the tachometer needle reachesÔ of the way to the red area of the tachom-eter display.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brakethe vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedalbeyond the pressure point (kickdown).

Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMGvehicles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).ROnly briefly allow the engine to reach a max-imum engine speed of 4,500 rpm.RAvoid driving off-road before the first differ-ential oil change at 2,000 miles (3,000 km).RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),drive in program C.

After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and bring the vehicleto full speed.You should also observe these notes on break-ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train onyour vehicle have been replaced.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed.

Axle differential transmission(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)Change the oil after a breaking-in period of2,000miles (3,000 km) to improve protection ofthe axle differential transmission.This oil change prolongs the service life of theaxle differential transmission. Have the oilchange carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Driving


G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell may restrictthe clearance around the pedals or block adepressed pedal. This jeopardizes the oper-ating and road safety of the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.Stow all objects securely in the vehicle so thatthey do not get into the driver's footwell.When using floormats or carpets, make surethat they are properly secured so that they donot slip or obstruct the pedals. Do not placeseveral floormats or carpets on top of oneanother.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.

Driving 103

Drivingandparking

Z

Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use theengine's full performance until it has reachedoperating temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission to thedesired drive position when the vehicle is sta-tionary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slippery roads.You could otherwise damage the drive train.

! Avoid high engine speeds when the engineis cold. The engine's service life could other-wise be significantly shortened. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.

! Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oiltemperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the max-imum engine speed is restricted in order toprotect the engine. To protect the engine andmaintain smooth engine operation, avoid driv-ing at full throttle when the engine is cold.

SmartKey positions

g To remove the SmartKey1 Power supply for some consumers, such as

the windshield wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)and drive position

3 To start the engineAs soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. If an indicator lamp does not go out afterstarting the engine or lights up while driving, see(Y page 189).If the SmartKey is in positiong in the ignitionlock for a longer period, it can no longer beturned in the ignition lock. The steering is thenlocked. To unlock, remove the SmartKey andreinsert it into the ignition lock.The steering is locked when you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey when the engine isswitched off.The starter battery could otherwise be dis-charged.

If you cannot turn the SmartKey in the ignitionlock, the starter battery may not be chargedsufficiently.X Check the starter battery and charge it if nec-essary (Y page 243).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 243).You can only remove the SmartKey if:Rthe SmartKey is in positiong in the ignitionlockRthe automatic transmission selector lever isinj

Starting the engine



104 DrivingDrivingandparking


G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

! Do not depress the accelerator when start-ing the engine.

Starting procedureX Shift the automatic transmission to positionj.

X Make sure that the parking brake is applied.X Turn the SmartKey to position3 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 104) and release it as soonas the engine is running.

You can also use the touch-start function. To dothis, turn the SmartKey to position3(Y page 104) and release it immediately. Theengine then starts automatically.

Pulling away

General notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedal whiledepressing the brake pedal. This impairsengine performance and results in prematurewear on the brake system and drivetrain.

! If a warning tone sounds and the ReleasePark. Brake message appears in the multi-function display, the parking brake is stillapplied. Release the parking brake.

Depress the accelerator carefully when pullingaway.The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulledaway. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature (Y page 166).It is possible to shift the transmission from posi-tionj to the desired position only if youdepress the brake pedal. Only then is the selec-tor lever lock released.

i Upshifts take place at higher engine speedsafter a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-verter to reach its operating temperaturemore quickly.

Pulling away with a trailerTo ensure that you do not roll back when pullingaway on an uphill slope, apply the parking brake.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionh ork.i Always wait until the shifting process iscomplete before driving off.

X Release the parking brake (Y page 121).

Driving 105

Drivingandparking

Z

X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

ECO start/stop function


G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notesThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehicle stopsmoving.The engine starts automatically when the driverwants to pull away again. The ECO start/stopfunction thereby helps you to reduce the fuelconsumption and emissions of your vehicle.The ECO start/stop function is activated eachtime the engine is switched on.The ECO start/stop function is only available indrive program C/E.The system is operational if all conditions forautomatic engine switch-off have been fulfilled(Y page 106) and theè symbol is shown ingreen in the multifunction display.In addition, the Stop/Start active messageis shown in the AMG menu in the multifunctiondisplay.If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off are fulfilled (Y page 106), theè ECOsymbol is shown in yellow in the multifunctiondisplay.In addition, the Stop/Start inactive mes-sage is shown in the AMG menu in the multi-function display.If the ECO start/stop function has been man-ually deactivated (Y page 106) or a malfunctionhas caused the system to be deactivated, theè ECO symbol is not displayed.The Stop/Start active or Stop/Startinactive message in the AMG menu in themultifunction display goes out.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function

X To deactivate: in drive program C/E, pressbutton:.

orX Switch to drive program S orM(Y page 113).Indicator lamp; on button: and theèsymbol in the multifunction display go out.The Stop/Start active or Stop/Startinactive message in the AMG menu in themultifunction display goes out.

X To activate: press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. If drive program Sor M is active, the automatic transmissionswitches to drive program C/E.If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 106) are fulfilled, theè ECOsymbol is shown in green in the multifunctiondisplay. In addition, the Stop/Start activemessage is shown in the AMG menu in themultifunction display.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 106) are fulfilled, theèECO symbol is not shown. If this is the case,the ECO start/stop function is not available.In addition, the Stop/Start inactive dis-play message is shown in the AMG menu inthe multifunction display.

i If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manuallyor as the result of a malfunction. The enginewill then not be switched off automaticallywhen the vehicle stops.

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill with thetransmission inh ori, the ECO start/stopfunction switches off the engine automatically.


The ECO start/stop function is operational andtheè ECO symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display, if:Rthe indicator lamp in theè ECO button islit greenRthe transfer case is in the HIGH RANGE on-road positionRthe vehicle is stationaryRthe outside temperature and the atmosphericair pressure is within the range that is suitablefor the systemRthe engine is at normal operating temperatureRthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reachedRthe battery is sufficiently chargedRthe system detects that the windshield is notfogged upwhen the air-conditioning system isswitched onRthe hood is closedRthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

If the conditions for automatic engine switch-offare not all fulfilled, theè ECO symbol isshown in yellow.In addition, the Stop/Start inactive mes-sage is shown in the AMG menu in the multi-function display.

i If you shift the transmission from R toD, theECO start/stop function is available againonce theè ECO symbol reappears ingreen in the multifunction display.

i The engine can be automatically switchedoff an unlimited number of times.

i You can still activate the HOLD functionwhen the vehicle is stationary, even if theengine has been switched off automatically. Itis then not necessary to continue applying thebrakes during the automatic stop phase.When you depress the accelerator pedal, theengine starts automatically and the brakingeffect of the HOLD function is deactivated.

Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, asthe engine must be started first.

i During automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control system only operates at areduced capacity. If you require full climatecontrol capacity, the ECO start/stop functioncan be deactivated by pressing the ECO but-ton (Y page 106).

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:RIn general:

- you switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button

- you release the brakes when in transmis-sion positionh ori, when the HOLDfunction is inactive

RBy the driver:- you release the brakes when in transmis-sion positionh ori

- you depress the accelerator pedal- you engage reverse geark- you move the transmission out of positionj

- you switch to drive program S or M- you unfasten your seat belt or open thedriver's door

RBy the system:- the vehicle starts to roll- the brake system requires this- the temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set range

- the system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched on

- the condition of charge of the battery is toolow

i Shifting the transmission to positionjdoes not start the engine.

Driving 107

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with the engine


The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Turn the SmartKey back to positiong in the ignition lock beforeattempting to start the engine again.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 105). Avoid excessively longand frequent attempts to start the engine (Y page 104) as these willdrain the battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard. The yellowreserve fuel warninglamp is lit and the needleof the fuel gage displayshows 0.

The fuel tank is empty.X Refuel the vehicle.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 243).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the startermotor to cool down for approximately twominutes.X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not runningsmoothly and is misfir-ing.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converterand damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.



The coolant temperaturegage shows a valueabove Adisplay message mayalso appear in the multi-function display and awarning tonemay sound.

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is nolonger being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 229). Observe the warning notesas you do so and add coolant if necessary.

If the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. The cool-ant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.X At coolant temperatures below drive to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

Adjustable damping

General notesWith adjustable damping you can choosebetween two different suspension settings.Suspension settings

COMF comfortable suspension setting

Sport sports suspension setting

Selecting the suspension setting

i If you select the sports suspension setting,the vehicle will dampen more roughly.

X Press button:.The indicator lamp lights up. SPORT is dis-played in themultifunction display. The sportssuspension setting is activated.

i If you select the comfortable suspensionsetting, the vehicle will dampen more softly.

X Press button;.The indicator lamp lights up. COMF is dis-played in the multifunction display. The com-fortable suspension setting is activated.

Automatic transmission


G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

i Bear in mind that the power transmissionbetween the engine and the transmission isinterrupted when the engine is switched off.

Automatic transmission 109

Drivingandparking

Z

the markingH.

the markingH,

For this reason, shift the automatic transmis-sion to P when the engine is switched off andthe vehicle is at a standstill. Apply the parkingbrake to prevent the vehicle from rollingaway.

Selector lever

Overview of transmission positions! If the engine speed is too high or if the vehi-cle is rolling, do not shift the transmissiondirectly from D to R, from R to D or directly toP.Do not open the driver's door while the vehi-cle is inmotion. At low speeds in transmissionposition D or R, park position P is otherwiseengaged automatically.The transmission could be damaged.

: P button: park position with parking lockk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveWhen you select a transmission position, theselector lever subsequently returns to its origi-nal position.The current transmission position P, R, N or Dappears in the transmission position display inthe multifunction display.

Transmission position and drive pro-gram display! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to check whetherthe desired transmission position is engaged.Select transmission position D. Do notrestrict the shift range.

Current transmission position: and currentdrive program; appear in the multifunctiondisplay.The current position of the selector lever isshown by the indicators next to the selectorlever.The indicators light up when the SmartKey isinserted into the ignition lock. The indicators goout when the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock.When the selector lever is in position D, you caninfluence the gearshifts made by the automatictransmission by:Rrestricting the shift rangeRchanging gear yourself

Engaging park position PX Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the P button in the center console.If you depress the brake pedal and push theselector lever forwards or back to the first pointof resistance, park position P is disengaged. Thetransmission shifts to neutral N.

Engaging reverse gear R! Only move the automatic transmission tok when the vehicle is stationary.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Push the selector lever forwards past the firstpoint of resistance.Transmission position R is engaged.

If you engage reverse gear and the ECO start/stop function is activated, the engine startsautomatically (Y page 106).

110 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Depending on the current transmission posi-tion, press the selector lever forwards orbackwards to the first point of resistance.The automatic transmission shifts into N.

If the engine has been switched off, the auto-matic transmission automatically shifts to N.If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in neutralN, the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically (Y page 106).

Remaining in neutral N



X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Make sure that the ignition is switched on.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X Make sure that the parking brake is released.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position DX Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Push the selector lever back past the firstpoint of resistance.The automatic transmission shifts into D.

If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in trans-mission position D, the ECO start/stop functionswitches off the engine automatically(Y page 106).


Drivingandparking

Z

Transmission positions

B Park positionThis prevents the vehicle from rollingaway when stopped.Only shift the transmission into posi-tion P when the vehicle is stationary(Y page 110). The parking lockshould not be used as a brake whenparking. Always apply the parkingbrake in addition to the parking lockin order to secure the vehicle.The SmartKey can only be removed ifthe transmission is in position P.When there is no SmartKey in theignition lock, the selector lever islocked in position P.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission into posi-tion R when the vehicle is stationary.

A ! Coasting in neutrali maycause damage to the drive train.

NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow you tomove the vehicle freely, e.g. to pushit or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty andthe vehicle is in danger of skiddinge.g. on icy roads: shift the transmis-sion to position N.If you engage the transfer case, shiftbriefly into N(Y page 146).

7 DriveThe automatic transmission changesgear automatically. All forward gearsare available.

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gear shiftingbehavior is determined by:Ra shift range restriction, if selectedRthe position of the transfer case (HIGHRANGE or LOW RANGE)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Driving tips

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to a lowergear depending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Kickdown is not available in the permanentman-ual drive program on Mercedes-AMG vehicles.

Rocking the vehicle freeRocking free by shifting back and forth betweentransmission positions D and R can help to freethe vehicle if it gets stuck. The vehicle's enginemanagement system limits the speed to a max-imum of 5mph (9 km/h) when shifting back andforth.Shifting back and forth between transmissionpositions D and R:X Move the selector lever forwards or back-wards past the point of resistance.


Towing a trailerX Drive in the middle of the engine speed rangeon uphill gradients.

X Vehicles except Mercedes‑AMG vehicles:limit the shift range to3 or2 depending on theuphill or downhill gradient (Y page 114). Thisalso applies if cruise control, the speed limiteror DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.Mercedes‑AMG vehicles: shift down to shiftrange 3 or 2 depending on the uphill or down-hill gradient (Y page 114). This also applies ifcruise control, the speed limiter orDISTRONIC PLUS is activated.

X Shift the transfer case into low-range drivingposition LOW RANGE on extreme uphill gra-dients or steep downhill gradients(Y page 146).

Program selector button

General notesThe program selector button allows you tochoose between drive programs with differentdriving characteristics.On Mercedes-AMG vehicles, drive program E iscalled drive program C.The automatic transmission switches to auto-matic drive program E (drive program C inMercedes-AMG vehicles) each time the engineis started.Only change from automatic drive program C orS tomanual drive programMwhen the vehicle isstationary.Drive programs available for vehiclesexcept Mercedes-AMG vehicles

E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

Drive programs available forMercedes‑AMG vehicles

C ControlledEfficiency

Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

For further information on the automatic driveprogram, see (Y page 114).

Selecting the drive program

Program selector button (except forMercedes-AMG vehicles)

Program selector button (Mercedes-AMGvehicles)

X Press program selector button: repeatedlyuntil the desired drive program is shown in themultifunction display.


Drivingandparking

Z

Steering wheel paddle shifters

In the automatic drive program, you can restrictor derestrict the shift range by using steeringwheel paddle shifters: and; (Y page 114).In the manual drive program you can changegears manually using steering wheel paddleshifters: and; (Y page 115).You can only change gear with the steeringwheel paddle shifters when the transmission isin position D.

Automatic drive programDrive program E (drive program C on Mercedes-AMG vehicles) is characterized by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine and transmissionsettings.Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from theautomatic transmission shifting up sooner.Rthe vehicle pulls away more gently in forwardand reverse gears, unless the acceleratorpedal is depressed fully.Rincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, for exam-ple.Rthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle being drivenat lower engine speeds and the wheels beingless likely to spin.

Drive program S is characterized by the follow-ing:Rsporty engine and transmission settings.Rthe vehicle pulling away in first gear.Rthe automatic transmission shifts up later.Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher asa result of the later automatic transmissionshift points.

Shift ranges

IntroductionIt is not possible to set the shift range onMercedes-AMG vehicles.When the automatic transmission is in positionD, it is possible to restrict or derestrict the shiftrange.The shift range selected is shown in the multi-function display. The automatic transmissionshifts only as far as the selected gear.Driving situations

= You can use the engine's brakingeffect

5 You can use the engine's brakingeffectThis setting is particularly suited fordriving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions

4 The braking effect of the engine canbe utilized on extremely steep down-hill gradients and long downhillstretches.

Restricting the shift rangeX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 114).The automatic transmission shifts down onegear and restricts the shift range to the rele-vant gear.

To protect against engine damage, the auto-matic transmission:Rdoes not shift down if doing so would causethe engine to exceed the maximum enginespeedRshifts up, even if the shift range is restricted,if the maximum engine speed for the shiftrange is reached and you continue to accel-erate


Derestricting the shift rangeX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 114).The automatic transmission shifts up onegear and restricts the shift range to the rele-vant gear.

Clearing the shift range restrictionX Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheelpaddle shifter (Y page 114) until transmissionposition D is shown in the multifunction dis-play.The automatic transmission shifts from thecurrent shift range directly to D.

Selecting the ideal shift rangeX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 114) and hold it in position.The automatic transmission shifts to the gearwhich allows optimum acceleration anddeceleration. To do this, the automatic trans-mission shifts down one or more gears.

The automatic transmission cannot shift downbeyond second gear. To shift to first gear, youhave to pull the left steering wheel paddleshifter.

Manual gear shifting

Temporary setting

X To activate: shift the selector lever to posi-tion P.

X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter: or;.Temporary setting will be active for a certainamount of time. Under certain conditions theminimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the

case of lateral acceleration, during an overrunphase or when driving on steep terrain.X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddleshifter; and hold it in place.

orX Use the lever to switch the transmission posi-tion.

orX Change the drive program.

Shifting gears! In manual mode, the automatic transmis-sion does not shift up automatically evenwhen the engine limiting speed for the currentgear is reached. When the engine limitingspeed is reached, the fuel supply is cut toprevent the engine from overrevving. Alwaysmake sure that the engine speed does notreach the red area of the tachometer. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.

X To shift up: pull steering wheel paddleshifter;.The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.

X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddleshifter:.The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-ing.If the engine exceeds the maximum enginespeed when shifting down, the automatictransmission protects against engine damageby not shifting down.


Drivingandparking

Z

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.X Shift to recommended gear; according togearshift recommendation: when shown inthe multifunction display of the instrumentcluster.

Manual drive program

General informationInmanual drive programM, you can change gearyourself by using the steering wheel paddleshifters. The transmissionmust be in positionD.The gear currently selected and engaged isshown in the multifunction display.Manual drive program M differs from drive pro-grams C and S with regard to spontaneity,responsiveness and smoothness of gearchanges.

Switching on the manual drive programX Shift the transmission to position D.X Press the program selector button repeatedlyuntil drive program M appears in the multi-function display.

Upshifting! When the engine limiting speed is reached,the fuel supply is cut to prevent the enginefrom overrevving. Always make sure that theengine speed does not reach the red area ofthe tachometer. There is otherwise a risk ofengine damage.

X When gearshift recommendation: appearson the multifunction display, pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter(Y page 114).The automatic transmission shifts to recom-mended gear;.

G 500: the automatic transmission shifts upautomatically when the limiting speed of theengine is reached.G 350 d in transfer case position HIGHRANGE: the automatic transmission shifts upautomatically when the limiting speed of theengine is reached.G 350 d in transfer case position LOWRANGE: the automatic transmission does notshift up automatically when the limiting speed ofthe engine is reached.Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic trans-mission does not shift up automatically whenthe limiting speed of the engine is reached.

Protection against reaching the over-revving range (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)! In manual mode, the automatic transmis-sion does not shift up automatically evenwhen the engine limiting speed for the currentgear is reached. When the engine limitingspeed is reached, the fuel supply is cut toprevent the engine from overrevving. Alwaysmake sure that the engine speed does notreach the red area of the tachometer. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.

Before the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi-function display.


X When gearshift recommendation: appearson the multifunction display, pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter(Y page 114).The automatic transmission shifts to recom-mended gear;.

DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 114).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

If you slow down or stop without shifting down,the automatic transmission automatically shiftsdown.

Selecting the optimal gear for maxi-mum accelerationX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter until the transmission selects the opti-mum gear according to the speed.

Switching off themanual drive programX All vehicles (except Mercedes‑AMG vehi-cles): press the program selector buttonrepeatedly until E or S is shown in the multi-function display.

X Mercedes‑AMGvehicles: press the programselector button repeatedly until C or S isshown in the multifunction display.

Problems with the automatic transmission


The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission no lon-ger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to positiong in the ignition lock.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

You hear a warning tone. You have:Rswitched off the engineRopened the driver's doorRnot shifted the selector lever to position PX Shift the selector lever to position P.


Drivingandparking

Z

Refueling


G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-eling process. otherwise electrostatic chargecould build up again.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when adding fuel from a fuel can.The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection systemcould otherwise be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray outwhen the fuel pump nozzle is removed.If you overfill the fuel tank, pressure may buildup in the fuel tank. This could cause fuel to sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.There is a risk of injury. The fuel tank is full whenthe fuel pump nozzle first switches off. End therefueling process.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 276).

Refueling

General informationPay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 118).If you unlock/lock the vehicle from the outside,the fuel filler flap also unlocks/locks.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed inthe instrument cluster8. The arrow next tothe filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.

118 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Opening the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; Tire pressure table= Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled? To insert the fuel filler capX Switch the engine off.i When the engine is running and the fuel fillerflap is open, the yellow reserve fuel warninglamp and the= (USA only) or; (Can-ada only) Check Engine warning lamp maylight up.Further information about warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster can befound in the Digital Operator's Manual.

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise andremove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holderbracket on the inside of filler flap?.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank and refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

Do not add any more fuel after the pump stopsfilling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leakout.

Closing the fuel filler flapX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-cle.

If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-sage appears in the multifunction display(Y page 179).

Fuel filler flap emergency release

The emergency release is located in the cargocompartment, on the right-hand side whenviewed in the direction of travel, behind the rearpanel trim.The vehicle walls in the area around the emer-gency release have sharp edges. There is a riskof injury. Avoid contact with the edges on theinside of the vehicle body.X Open the rear door.X Pull off edge protection;.X Remove rear wall trim:.

X Pull emergency release= in the direction ofthe arrow.The fuel filler flap is unlocked.

X Open the fuel filler flap (Y page 119).

Refueling 119

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with the fuel and fuel tank


Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

G WARNINGThe fuel line or the fuel tank is defective.There is a risk of fire or explosion.X Apply the parking brake.X Turn the SmartKey to positiong (Y page 104) immediately andremove it.

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap cannotbe opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 63).X Open the rear door.X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release(Y page 119).

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 64).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release(Y page 119).

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking


G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.


120 ParkingDrivingandparking

To ensure that the vehicle is safeguardedagainst rolling away unintentionally:Rthe parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmissionmust be in positionP and theSmartKey must be removed from the ignitionlockRthe transfer case must not be in the neutralpositionRthe front wheels must be turned towards thecurb on steep uphill or downhill gradientsRthe empty vehicle must be secured at thefront axle with a wheel chock or similarobject, for example, on uphill or downhill gra-dientsRa laden vehicle must also be secured at therear axle with a wheel chock or similar object,for example, on uphill or downhill gradients

Switching off the engine

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionP.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0in the ignitionlock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

X Apply the parking brake firmly.X Turn the steering wheel until the steeringwheel lock engages.

If you switch the engine off with the transmis-sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-sion shifts to N automatically.If you then open the driver's door or the front-passenger door or remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition, the automatic transmission shiftsto P automatically.If you switch off the engine while the transmis-sion is in positionN, the automatic transmissionremains in N even if a door is opened. The auto-matic transmission only automatically shifts

into neutral N when you switch off the engineusing the SmartKey.

Parking brake

G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-cle when the service brake is faulty. Do notapply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.


If you brake the vehicle with the parking brake,the brake lamps will not light up.If you pull away with the parking brake applied,a warning tone sounds.

Parking 121

Drivingandparking

Z

X To apply: pull parking brake lever; upfirmly.When the ignition is switched on, theF(USA only) orJ (Canada only) indicatorlamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

X To release: pull parking brake lever;slightly.

X Press release button: and guide parkingbrake; down to the stop.TheF (USA only) or! (Canada only)indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goesout.

The vehicle can also be braked during an emer-gency by using the parking brake.X To brake in an emergency: press and holdrelease button: and carefully pull parkingbrake lever; upwards.

If you drive on wet roads or dirt-covered surfa-ces, road salt and/or dirt could get into theparking brake.In order to prevent corrosion and a reduction inthe braking power of the parking brake, observethe following:Rpull the parking brake up with release but-ton: depressed from time to time beforebeginning a journey.Rdrive for approximately 110 yds (100 m) at amaximum speed of 12 mph (20 km/h)

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than sixweeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seekadvice.i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.

Driving tips

General driving tips


G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communication equip-ment while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for the countryin which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-hibit the driver from using a mobile phone whiledriving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-free mode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers adistance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-ond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to the rec-ommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof carriers when they are not nee-ded.

X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all service and maintenance work car-ried out at the specified intervals.

122 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Fuel consumption also increaseswhen driving incold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-rain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent is greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.

Emission control


Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance with themanufacturer's specifications. Always havework on the engine carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, workrelevant to safety or on safety-related systemsmust be carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.The engine settings must not be changed underany circumstances. Furthermore, all specificservice work must be carried out at regularintervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. You can obtain cur-rent information concerning the servicing ofyour vehicle at any time from a qualified spe-cialist workshop. This could be an overview of

the maintenance work or any additional main-tenance work, for example.

Brakes


G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G WARNINGIf you select the LOW RANGE off-road gear ona slippery road surface, the wheels could losetraction:Rif you remove your foot from the accelera-tor pedal when drivingRif off road ABS intervenes when brakingIf the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can nolonger be steered. There is an increased dan-ger of skidding and accidents.Never select the LOW RANGE off-road gearwhen driving on slippery road surfaces.

Information on the parking brake (Y page 121).

Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shifting to alower gear in good time. This allows you totake advantage of the engine's braking effect.This helps you to avoid overheating thebrakes and wearing them out excessively.When you take advantage of engine braking, adrive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g.on a slippery road surface. This could causedamage to the drive train. This type of damageis not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war-ranty.

This also applies if cruise control or DISTRONICPLUS is activated.

Driving tips 123

Drivingandparking

Z

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately. Driveon for a short while. This allows the airflow tocool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf driving in heavy rain for a prolonged period oftime without braking, there may be a delayedreaction from the brakes when braking for thefirst time. This may also occur after the vehiclehas been washed.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehiclewashed, brake firmly while paying attention tothe traffic conditions. This will warm up thebrake discs, thereby drying them more quicklyand protecting them against corrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-due may form on the brake discs and brakepads. This can result in a significantly longerbraking distance.RIn order to prevent any salt build-up, apply thebrakes occasionally while paying attention tothe traffic conditions.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes! The brake fluid level may be too low, if:Rif the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster andRyou hear a warning tone while the engine isrunning

Observe additional warning messages in themultifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immediately.Consult a qualified specialist workshop toarrange this.

! If the brake warning lamp lights up in theinstrument cluster and you hear a warningtone even though the parking brake has beenreleased, the brake fluid level may be too low.Observe additional warning messages in themultifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checked immediately.This work should be carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! A function or performance test should onlybe carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. Ifyou wish to operate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop in advance. You could oth-erwise damage the drive train or the brakesystem.

! The ESP® system operates automatically. Ifthe parking brake is tested on a brake dyna-mometer (for a maximum of ten seconds), theengine and the ignition must be switched off.Braking triggered automatically by ESP® mayotherwise cause severe damage to the brakesystem.

All checks and maintenance work on the brakesystem must be carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test the functional-ity of your brakes at regular intervals.Information on BAS (Brake Assist) (Y page 58).


For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends only installing the following brake disksand brake pads/linings:Rbrake disks that have been approved byMercedes-BenzRbrake pads/linings that have been approvedbyMercedes-Benz or that are of an equivalentstandard of quality

Other brake disks or brake pads/linings cancompromise the safety of your vehicle.Always replace all brake disks and brake pads/linings on an axle at the same time. Alwaysinstall new brake pads/linings when replacingbrake disks.The vehicle is equipped with lightweight brakedisks to which the wheel assembly with rim andthreaded connection is matched.The use of brake discs other than thoseapproved by Mercedes-Benz may alter trackwidth and is subject to approval, if applicable.Shock-type loads when handling the brakediscs, such as when changing wheels, can leadto a reduction in comfort when driving with light-weight brake discs. Avoid shock-type loads onthe lightweight brake disks, particularly on thebrake plate.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only usebrake fluid that has been specially approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre-sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brakefluid which has not been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of anequivalent quality could affect your vehicle'soperating safety.

High-performance brake (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)The AMG brake systems are designed for heavyloads. This may lead to noise when braking.This will depend on:RSpeedRBraking forceRAmbient conditions, e.g. temperature andhumidity

The wear of individual brake system compo-nents such as the brake pads/linings or brakediscs depends on individual driving style andoperating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-age that will be valid under all circumstances. Anaggressive driving style will lead to high wear.

You can obtain more information on this from aqualified specialist workshop.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving andbraking accordingly during this break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-ingly high brake wear. If the brake pads/liningshave reached their wear limit, the multifunctiondisplay shows a corresponding message. Espe-cially for high performance driving, it is impor-tant to maintain and have the brake systemchecked regularly.

Driving on slippery surfaces! Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slippery roads.You could otherwise damage the drive train.This type of damage is not covered by theterms of the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

! If possible, do not let the drive wheels spin.Otherwise, you could damage the drive train.

X Engage the differential locks if necessary(Y page 148).

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depth onthe road surface, there is a danger of hydro-planing occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speedsRthe tires have adequate tread depthFor this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speedRavoid rutsRavoid sudden steering movementsRbrake carefully

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas. Checkthe depth of any water before driving throughit. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-

Driving tips 125

Drivingandparking

Z

erwise, watermay enter the vehicle interior orthe engine compartment. This can damagethe electronic components in the engine orthe automatic transmission. Water can alsobe drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzlesand this can cause engine damage.

If you have to drive on stretches of road onwhichwater has collected, please bear in mind that:Rin the case of standing water, the water levelmust be no higher than the lower edge of thevehicle bodyRyou should drive no faster than walking pace

Off-road fording! Under no circumstances should you accel-erate before entering the water. The bowwave could cause water to enter and damagethe engine and other assemblies.

! Do not open any of the vehicle's doors whilefording. Otherwise, water could get into thevehicle interior and damage the vehicle'selectronics and interior equipment.

i You may only drive through fresh water.RObserve the safety notes (Y page 127) andgeneral notes (Y page 127) on driving off-road.REstablish how deep the water is and the char-acteristics of the body of water before ford-ing.RSwitch off automatic climate controlRShift the transfer case to the off-road drivingposition LOW RANGE (Y page 145).REngage the differential locks if necessary(Y page 148).RAvoid high engine speeds.REnter and exit the water at a flat place and ata steady walking pace.RDrive slowly and at an even speed through thewater.REnsure that a bow wave does not form as youdrive.RDo not stop and do not switch off the engine.Water offers a high degree of resistance, andthe ground is slippery and in some casesunstable. Therefore, it is difficult and danger-ous to pull away in water.RClean any mud from the tire tread after ford-ing.RApply the brakes to dry them after fording.

Always observe the fording depth values(Y page 283).

Winter driving

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.

G WARNINGIf you select the LOW RANGE off-road gear ona slippery road surface, the wheels could losetraction:Rif you remove your foot from the accelera-tor pedal when drivingRif off road ABS intervenes when brakingIf the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can nolonger be steered. There is an increased dan-ger of skidding and accidents.Never select the LOW RANGE off-road gearwhen driving on slippery road surfaces.

Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering andbrakingmaneuvers. Do not use cruise control orDISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning device andis therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freezingpoint do not guarantee that the road surface isfree of ice. The roadmay still be icy, especially inwooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle couldskid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always


adapt your driving style and drive at a speed tosuit the prevailing weather conditions.You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 253).For more information on driving with summertires, see (Y page 253).Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-tion (Y page 252).

Off-road driving


G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is arisk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb, a speed bump or a pothole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the underbody orparts of the chassis

In situations like this, the body, the under-body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could bedamaged without the damage being visible.Components damaged in this way can unex-

pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, nolonger withstand the loads they are designedto.If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-bustible materials such as leaves, grass ortwigs can gather between the underbody andthe underbody paneling. If these materialscome in contact with hot parts of the exhaustsystem, they can catch fire.In such situations, have the vehicle checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,paying attention to road and traffic condi-tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

When driving off-road, substances such as sand,mud and water or water mixed with oil may getinto the brakes. This may lead to a reduction inbraking performance or total brake failure as aresult of increased wear. The braking charac-teristics change depending on the materialentering the brakes. Clean the brakes after driv-ing off-road. If you detect a reduced brakingeffect or grinding noises, have the brake systemchecked in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible. Adapt your driving style to thedifferent braking characteristics.Driving off-road increases the likelihood of dam-age to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead tofailure of the mechanical assembly or systems.Adapt your driving style to suit the terrain con-ditions. Drive carefully. Have damage to thevehicle rectified immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Do not switch to transmission position N whendriving off-road. If you try to brake the vehicleusing the service brake, you could lose controlof the vehicle. If the gradient is too steep for yourvehicle, drive back down in reverse gear.

General notes

H Environmental noteProtection of the environment is of primaryimportance. Treat nature with respect.Observe all prohibiting signs.

Read this section carefully before driving yourvehicle off-road. Practice by driving over moregentle off-road terrain first.

Driving tips 127

Drivingandparking

Z

Familiarize yourself with the characteristics ofyour vehicle and the gear shift operation beforedriving through difficult terrain.The following driving systems are speciallyadapted to off-road driving:R4ETS (Y page 59)ROff-road ABS (Y page 58)RTransfer case (Y page 145)RDifferential locks (Y page 120)Observe the following notes:RStop the vehicle before you drive off-road and,if necessary, shift the transfer case to the off-road driving position LOW RANGE(Y page 146).REngage the differential locks if necessary(Y page 148).

i ABS, 4ETS, ESP® and BAS are deactivatedwhile the differential locks are engaged. Thisallows the front wheels to lock briefly, so thatthese can dig into a loose surface. However,please note that locked wheels skid and canno longer steer.RCheck that items of luggage and loads arestowed safely and are well secured(Y page 209).RTo avoid damaging the vehicle, make surethere is always sufficient ground clearance.RAlways keep the engine running and in gearwhen driving on a downhill gradient.RAlways keep the engine running and in gearwhen driving down an incline.RDrive slowly and evenly, if necessary at awalking pace.REnsure that the wheels are in contact with theground at all times.RDrivewith extreme care on unfamiliar off-roadroutes where visibility is poor. For safety rea-sons, get out of the vehicle first and surveythe off-road route.RCheck the depth ofwater before fording riversand streams.RWatch out for obstacles.RAlways keep the doors, rear door, side win-dows and the sliding sunroof closed while thevehicle is in motion.RSwitch off cruise control.RDo not deviate from marked routes.RAdapt your speed to the terrain. The rougher,steeper ormore ruts on the terrain, the sloweryour speed should be.

RDo not jumpwith the vehicle. as this will inter-rupt the vehicle's propulsion.RAvoid high engine speeds. Drive at appropri-ate engine speeds (maximum 3,000 rpm).RDo not shift the automatic transmission toposition N.RAlways check the vehicle for damage after off-road driving.

Do not use the HOLD function when driving off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients or onslippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD functioncannot hold the vehicle on such surfaces.You can obtain further information about retro-fitting special all-terrain tires from a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Checklist before driving off-road! If the engine oil warning lamp lights up whilethe vehicle is in motion, stop the vehicle in asafe place as soon as possible. Check theengine oil level. The engine oil warning lampwarning must not be ignored. Continuing thejourney while the symbol is displayed couldlead to engine damage.

X Engine oil level: check the engine oil leveland add oil if necessary.When driving on steep gradients, the engineoil level must be sufficiently high to ensure acorrect oil supply in the vehicle.

X Tire-changing tool kit: check that the jack isworking and make sure you have the lugwrench, a robust tow cable and a foldingspade in the vehicle.

X Wheels and tires: check the tire tread depthand tire pressure.

X Check for damage and remove any foreignobjects, e.g. small stones, from the wheels/tires.

X Replace any missing valve caps.X Replace dented or damaged wheels. Alsocheck the spare wheel.

X Rims: dented or bent rims can result in a lossof tire pressure and damage the tire bead.Before driving off-road, check the wheels andreplace them if necessary.


Checklist after driving off-road! If you detect damage to the vehicle afterdriving off-road, have the vehicle checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.

Driving over rough terrain places greaterdemands on your vehicle than driving on normalroads. After driving off-road, check the vehicle.This allows you to detect damage promptly andreduce the risk of an accident to yourself andother road users.X Shift the transfer case to the on-road positionHIGH RANGE (Y page 146).

X Disengage the differential locks(Y page 149).

X Clean the headlamps and rear lights andcheck for damage.

X Clean the front and rear license plates.X Clean the wheels and tires with a water jetand remove any foreign objects.

X Clean the wheels, wheel housings and thevehicle underside with a water jet; check forany foreign objects and damage.

X Check whether twigs or other parts of plantshave become trapped. These increase the riskof fire and can damage fuel pipes, brakehoses or the rubber bellows of the axle jointsand propeller shafts.

X After the trip, examine without fail the entireundercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes, body-work structure, steering, chassis and exhaustsystem for damage.

X After driving in sand, mud, gravel, water orsimilar dirty conditions, have the followingchecked and cleaned:Rbrake discsRwheelsRbrake padsRaxle joints

X If you notice strong vibrations after off-roaddriving, check for foreign objects in thewheels and drive train and, if necessary,remove them. Foreign objects can disturb thebalance and cause vibrations.

X Carry out a brake test.

Driving on sandObserve the following rules when driving onsand:RShift the transfer case to the off-road drivingposition LOW RANGE (Y page 146).RAvoid high engine speeds.RShift the automatic transmission to a lowgear.RDrive quickly to overcome the rolling resist-ance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels couldbecome stuck in loose ground.RDrive in the tracks of other vehicles if possi-ble. When doing so, make sure that:- the tire ruts are not too deep- the sand is sufficiently firm- your vehicle has sufficient ground clear-ance

Tire ruts and gravel roads! Check that the ruts are not too deep andthat your vehicle has sufficient clearance.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged orbottom out and get stuck.

Observe the following rules when driving alongruts in off-road terrain or on roads with loosegravel:RShift the transfer case to the off-road drivingposition LOW RANGE (Y page 146).RAvoid high engine speeds.RObserve the safety notes (Y page 127) andthe general notes (Y page 127) on off-roaddriving.RShift the automatic transmission to a lowgear.RDrive slowly.RWhere ruts are too deep, drive with thewheels of one side on the center grassy area,if possible.

Driving over obstacles! Obstacles could damage the floor of thevehicle or components of the chassis. Askpassengers for guidance when driving overlarge obstacles. The passenger should alwayskeep a safe distance from the vehicle whendoing so in order to avoid injury as a result ofunexpected vehicle movements. After drivingoff-road or over obstacles, check the vehicle

Driving tips 129

Drivingandparking

Z

for possible damage, especially to the under-body and the components of the chassis.

! Drive with particular care when driving overan obstacle while driving up or down a steepslope.The vehicle could otherwise tilt and slide side-ways or tip over.

Observe the following rules when driving overtree stumps, large stones and other obstacles:RObserve the safety notes (Y page 127) andthe general notes (Y page 127) on off-roaddriving.RShift the transfer case to the off-road drivingposition LOW RANGE (Y page 146).RAvoid high engine speeds.RShift the automatic transmission to a lowgear.RMake sure that you have enough groundclearance before driving across an obstacle.RDrive very slowly.RTry to drive straight over the center of obsta-cles: front wheel first, then rear wheel.

Traveling uphill

Approach/departure angle


Always observe the approach/departure anglevalues (Y page 283).RObserve the safety notes (Y page 127) andgeneral notes (Y page 127) on driving off-road.RDo not drive at an angle on slopes, inclines orgradients, but instead follow the direct line offall. Note that the climbing ability of your vehi-cle depends on the terrain conditions.RBefore driving on extreme uphill and extremedownhill gradients, set the transfer case tothe off-road driving position LOW RANGE(Y page 146).

REngage the differential locks if necessary(Y page 148).RDrive slowly.RAccelerate gently and make sure that thewheels are gripping.RAvoid high engine speeds, except when driv-ing on sandy andmuddy routes with high driv-ing resistance.RAvoid high engine speeds – drive at an appro-priate engine speed (maximum 3,000 rpm).RWhen driving down an incline,make use of theengine's braking effect. Observe the enginespeed; do not overrev the engine.Further information on the maximum enginespeed: (Y page 157).RShift the automatic transmission to a low gearappropriate for tackling an uphill gradient or along, steep downhill gradient.

Hill start assist will aid you when pulling away ona hill. For further information about hill startassist, see (Y page 127).

Maximum gradient-climbing capabilityAlways observe the maximum gradient climbingability values (Y page 283).

HilltopsWhen driving up an uphill gradient, slightlyreduce pressure on the accelerator immediatelybefore reaching the brow of the hill (do not shiftthe transmission into N). Make use of the vehi-cle's own impetus to travel over the brow.This style of driving prevents:Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on thebrow of a hillRloss of tractionRthe vehicle from traveling too quickly downthe other side

Driving downhillRDrive slowly.RDo not drive at an angle down steep inclines.Steer into the line of fall and drive with thefront wheels aligned straight. Otherwise, thevehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover.RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients, shiftthe automatic transmission to a low gear.By doing so, you will use the braking effect ofthe engine to reduce the speed. If this is not


sufficient, brake gently. When doing so, makesure that the vehicle is facing in the directionof the line of fall.RObserve the notes on driving in mountainousterrain (Y page 130).RCheck that the service brake is working nor-mally after a long downhill stretch.

When driving at speeds below 37 mph(60 km/h), off-road ABS is activated and thefront wheels lock cyclically during braking. Thedigging-in effect achieved in the processreduces the stopping distance on off-road ter-rain. This limits steering capability.

Driving systems

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant road speedfor you. It brakes automatically in order to avoidexceeding the set speed. Change into a lowergear in good time on long and steep downhillgradients.This is especially important if the vehicle isladen. By doing so, you will make use of thebraking effect of the engine. This relieves theload on the brake system and prevents thebrakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steadyspeed for a prolonged period. You can store anyroad speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).Do not activate cruise control on off-road jour-neys.

Important safety notesCruise control can neither reduce the risk of anaccident if you fail to adapt your driving style noroverride the laws of physics. Cruise control can-not take into account the road, traffic andweather conditions. Cruise control is only anaid. You are responsible for maintaining a safedistance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and for staying inlane.Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions that do not allowyou to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in

heavy traffic, on winding roads or on roughterrainRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRin poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

i The speed indicated in the speedometermay differ slightly from the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: Activates or increases speed; Activates or reduces speed= Deactivates cruise control? Activates at the current speed/last stored

speedWhen you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction display forfive seconds.Speedometer with segments: when cruisecontrol is activated, the segments from thestored speed to the end of the scale light up.

Storing, maintaining and calling up aspeed

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedYou can store the current speed if you are driv-ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.X Briefly press the cruise control lever up: ordown;.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-matically maintains the stored speed.

Driving systems 131

Drivingandparking

Z

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill and downhill gra-dients. The stored speed is resumedwhen thegradient levels out. Cruise control maintainsthe stored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

Calling up the stored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicle deceler-ates. If you do not know the stored speed, thevehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. Thereis a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is activated and adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed stored.If no speed is stored, cruise control stores thecurrent speed and maintains it.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in5 mph incre-ments (10km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down;beyond the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-ate to overtake, cruise control adjusts the

vehicle's speed to the last speed stored afteryou have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruise con-trol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards=.

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou apply the parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20mph (30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion N while drivingRyou engage a differential lockIf cruise control is deactivated, a warning tonesounds. You will see the Cruise Control Offmessage in themultifunction display for approx-imately five seconds. The message on the mul-tifunction display disappears and the segmentson the speedometer go out.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and auto-matically helps you maintain the distance fromthe vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detec-ted with the aid of the radar sensor system.DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so thatthe set speed is not exceeded.Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients.This is especially important if the vehicle isladen. By doing so, you will make use of thebraking effect of the engine. This relieves theload on the brake system and prevents thebrakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a critical risk of col-lisionwith the vehicle in front, youwill bewarnedvisually and acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS can-not prevent a collisionwithout your intervention.An intermittent warning tone sounds and the

132 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

· distance warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up. Brake immediately in order toincrease the distance to the vehicle in front ortake evasive action provided it is safe to do so.DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the speed rangebetween 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph(200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, itcan resemble the radar detectors of the respon-sible authorities. You can refer to the relevantchapter in the Operator's Manual if questionsare asked about this.

i USA only: This device has been approved bythe FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". Theradar sensor is intended for use in an auto-motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-ing, or altering of the device will void any war-ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Donot tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted.Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.


G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing traffic

As a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 40% of the maximum braking force. If thisbraking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUSwarns you visually and audibly. There is a riskof an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONICPLUS can neither reduce the risk of an accidentnor override the laws of physics. DISTRONICPLUS cannot take account of road, weather andtraffic conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only anaid. You are responsible for maintaining a safedistance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and for staying inlane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions that do not allowyou to maintain a constant speed, e.g. inheavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating can cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

Driving systems 133

Drivingandparking

Z

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi-cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi-cles driving on a different line.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, for exam-ple, in parking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehiclein front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedlyaccelerate the vehicle to the stored speed.This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane oran exit laneRbe so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-cles driving on the left (left-hand drive coun-tries)Rbe so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-cles driving on the right (right-hand drivecountries)

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

: Activates or increases speed; Activates or reduces speed= Deactivates DISTRONIC PLUS? Activates at the current speed/last stored

speedA Sets a specified minimum distanceWhen you activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the storedspeed appears in the multifunction display forfive seconds.Speedometer with segments: whenDISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the segments

from the stored speed to the end of the scalelight up.

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsIn order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-lowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take up totwo minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe parking brake must be released.Rthe differential lock must be disengaged.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe automatic transmission is shifted to posi-tion D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift the transmission from P toD or your seatbelt must be fastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmustbe closed.Rthe vehicle must not slide.Rthe transfer case must be shifted to the on-road position HIGH RANGE.Rthe vehicle must not be on an uphill or down-hill gradient of more than 22‑25%.

ActivatingX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, up: or down;.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.

X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.The vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive mes-sage appears in themultifunction display. Theset distance to a slower-moving vehicle infront will then not be maintained. You will bedriving at the speed you determine by theposition of the accelerator pedal.

You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS whenstationary. The lowest speed that can be set is20 mph (30 km/h).X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, up: or down;.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.


Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.


X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time itis activated, the current speed is stored. Oth-erwise, it sets the vehicle speed to the previ-ously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and drivingX If you want to pull away with DISTRONICPLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal.


orX Accelerate briefly.The vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed tothat of the vehicle in front. If no vehicle isdetected in front, your vehicle accelerates tothe stored speed.

The vehicle can also pull away when it is facingan unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle thenbrakes automatically.If DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a vehicle infront, the system operates like a cruise control.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is driving slower, your vehicle brakes. Inthis way, the specified minimum distance youhave selected is maintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed tothe set speed.

If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.

Selecting the drive programDISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving stylewhen you have selected the S driving program(Y page 114). Acceleration behind the vehicle infront or to the set speed is then noticeably moredynamic. If you have selected drive programE orC (Mercedes-AMG vehicles), the vehicle accel-erates more gently. This setting is recommen-ded in stop-start traffic.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph (60 km/h)RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the distanceto a vehicle in frontRyou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger ofcollision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted ifchanging lanes takes too long or if the distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle in frontbecomes too small.When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS moni-tors the left lane on left-hand drive vehicles andthe right lane on right-hand drive vehicles.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.

Driving systems 135

Drivingandparking

Z

If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

For further information on deactivatingDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 136).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it isstationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-tionary and you do not need to depress thebrake.Depending on the specified minimum distance,your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi-cient distance behind the vehicle in front. Thespecified minimum distance is set using thecontrol on the cruise control lever.The automatic transmission shifts automaticallyto transmission position P, if DISTRONIC PLUSis activated and:Rthe driver's seat belt is not fastened and thedriver's door is open.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction.

On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there isa malfunction, the automatic transmission mayalso automatically be shifted to position P.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly push the cruise control leverforward:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationaryWhen you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, theDISTRONIC PLUS Offmessage is shown in the

multifunction display for approximately five sec-onds.The last speed stored remains stored until youswitch off the engine.DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivatedif:Ryou apply the parking brakeRyou are driving slower than 15mph (25 km/h)and there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehiclein front is no longer detectedRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe automatic transmission is in position P, Ror NRyou pull the cruise control lever towards youin order to pull away and the front-passengerdoor or one of the rear doors is openRthe vehicle slipsIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, an intermit-tent warning tone sounds and the DISTRONICPLUS Offmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay for approximately five seconds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUSPay particular attention in the following trafficsituations:RCornering, entering and exiting a bend: theability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicleswhen cornering is limited. Your vehicle maybrake unexpectedly or late.RDriving on a different line: DISTRONIC PLUSmay not detect vehicles which are not drivingin the middle of their lane. The distance to thevehicle in front will be too short.ROther vehicles changing lane: DISTRONICPLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting inyet. The distance to this vehicle will be tooshort.RNarrow vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUS does notdetect the vehicle in front on the edge of theroad because of its narrow width. The dis-tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.RObstacles and stationary vehicles:DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obsta-cles or stationary vehicles. If, for example, thedetected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an


obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONICPLUS will not brake for these.RCrossing vehicles: DISTRONIC PLUSmaymis-takenly detect vehicles that are crossing yourlane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at trafficlights with crossing traffic, for example, couldcause your vehicle to pull away unintention-ally.

In such situations, brake if necessary.DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist monitors the areas on eitherside of the vehicle that are not visible to thedriver with two lateral, rear-facing radar sen-sors. A warning lamp lights up in the exteriormirrors and draws your attention to vehiclesdetected in the monitored area. If you thenswitch on the corresponding turn signal tochange lane, you will also receive an optical andaudible warning.Blind Spot Assist supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h).


G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving. Always ensure that there issufficient distance to the side for other roadusers and obstacles.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCC asa "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensoris intended for use in an automotive radar

system only. Removing, tampering with, oraltering the device will void any warranties,and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-per with, alter, or use in any non-approvedway.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user’s authority to operate theequipment.

Radar sensorsThe radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that thebumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. Thesensors must not be covered, for example bycycle racks or overhanging loads. Following asevere impact or in the event of damage to thebumpers, have the function of the radar sensorschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly.

Monitoring areaIn particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavyrain, snow or sprayRthere are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles orbicyclesRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanesRyou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or other road boundaries

Driving systems 137

Drivingandparking

Z

At a distance of around1.6 ft (0.5m); from thevehicle, Blind Spot Assist monitors the area upto 10 ft (3 m) next to= and behind: yourvehicle, as shown in the picture.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay beindicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-ing in the middle of their lane. This may be thecase if the vehicles are driving on the inner sideof their lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when drivingclose to crash barriers or similar solid laneborders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, such astrucks.

Indicator and warning lamp

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampWhen Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights up yellowat speeds of up to 20mph (30 km/h). At speedsabove 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lampgoes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp: on the cor-responding side lights up red. This warningoccurs when a vehicle enters the blind spotmonitoring range from behind or from the side.When you overtake a vehicle, the warning onlyoccurs as long as the difference in speed is lessthan 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assistis no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warning lampsis adjusted automatically according to the ambi-ent light.

Collision warning

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring range ofBlind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-sponding turn signal, a double warning tonesounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. If the turnsignal remains on, detected vehicles are indica-ted by the flashing of red warning lamp:.There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot Assist

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activatedin the on-board computer (Y page 164).

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors lightup red for approximately 1.5 seconds andthen turn yellow.


HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without the driverhaving to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.Do not use the HOLD function when driving off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients or onslippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD functioncannot hold the vehicle on such surfaces.


G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-ically in certain situations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 139).

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunctionRthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt isfastenedRthe parking brake is releasedRthe transmission is in position D, R or NRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

Activating the HOLD functionX Make sure that the activation conditions aremet.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal further untilë appears in the multifunction display.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

If depressing the brake pedal the first time doesnot activate the HOLD function, wait briefly andthen try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivated automaticallyif:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Rthe transmission is in positionj.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer-tain amount of pressure untilë disap-pears from the multifunction display.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUSOn steep uphill or downhill gradients or if thereis a malfunction, the transmission may also beautomatically shifted into position P.

Permanent all-wheel drive! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.This may damage the transfer case. Damageof this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels mustremain either on the ground or be fully raised.Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-cle with all wheels in full contact with theground.

Driving systems 139

Drivingandparking

Z

! When testing the parking brake, operate thevehicle only briefly (for a maximum of ten sec-onds) on a brake test dynamometer. Whendoing this, turn the SmartKey to position 0 or1 in the ignition. Failure to do this can causedamage to the drive train or the brake system.

! A function or performance test should onlybe carried out on a two-axle dynamometer.Before you operate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult a qualifiedworkshop. You could otherwise damage thedrive train or the brake system.

The all-wheel drive system ensures that all fourwheels are permanently driven. The all-wheeldrive system improves vehicle traction togetherwith ESP® and 4ETS if a drive wheel spins due toinsufficient grip.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.RTake your foot off the accelerator, slowly,while the vehicle is in motion.

Only when you use winter tires (M+S tires) and,if necessary, snow chains in wintry driving con-ditions (Y page 253). Only in this way can themaximum effect of all-wheel drive be achieved.For information on driving off-road, see(Y page 127).

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area aroundyour vehicle using six sensors in the frontbumper and four sensors in the rear bumper.PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly thedistance between your vehicle and an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediate sur-roundings. You are always responsible for safemaneuvering, parking and exiting a parkingspace. Make sure that there are no persons,animals or objects in the maneuvering areawhile maneuvering and parking in parkingspaces.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, such asflower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONICdoes not detect such objects when they are in

the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Youcould damage the vehicle or the objects.The sensors may not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic carwash, the compressed-air brakes on a truckor a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONICto malfunction.PARKTRONIC may not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.

Range of the sensorsPARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-sideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, ani-mals or objects.Rabove the detection range, e.g. overhangingloads, tail sections or loading ramps of goodsvehicles

: Example: sensors in the front bumper, right-hand side


: Approx. 24 in (approx. 60 cm) (corners); Approx. 32 in (approx. 80 cm) (corners)= Approx. 35 in (approx. 90 cm) (center)? Approx. 40 in (approx. 100 cm) (center)The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.They can otherwise not function correctly. Cleanthe sensors regularly, taking care not to scratchor damage them (Y page 234).Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

Corners Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-evant warning displays light up and a warningtone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-imum, the distance may no longer be shown.

Warning displays

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-

cle; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-

cle= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is located onthe dashboard above the center air vents. Thewarning display for the rear area is located onthe headliner in the rear compartment.The warning display for each side of the vehicleis divided into five yellow and two red segments.PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segmentsshowing operational readiness= light up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-mine which warning display is active when theengine is running.

Transmission posi-tion

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicle isrolling backwards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-cle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-mittent warning tone for approximately twoseconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two seconds.

Driving systems 141

Drivingandparking

Z

This indicates that you have now reached theminimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp: lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lock.

Towing a trailerPARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear areawhen you establish an electrical connectionbetween your vehicle and a trailer.

Problems with PARKTRONIC


Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit. Youalso hear a warning tonefor approximately twoseconds.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after a few sec-onds, and the indicatorlamp in the PARKTRONICbutton lights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after a few sec-onds.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 234).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-sound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.


Rear view camera

General notes

Rear view camera: is an optical parking andmaneuvering aid. It shows the area behind thevehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-tem.The area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

i The text shown in the multimedia systemdepends on the language setting. The follow-ing are examples of rear view camera displaysin the multimedia system.

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your immedi-ate surroundings. You are always responsiblefor safe maneuvering and parking. Make surethat there are no persons, animals or objects inthe maneuvering area while maneuvering andparking in parking spaces.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will function ina limited manner:Rthe rear door is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-ter

Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedObserve the notes on cleaning(Y page 235)Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thiscase, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcamera

X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey isin position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the "Rear view camera" func-tion is selected in themultimedia system (seeDigital Operator's Manual).

X Engage reverse gear.The multimedia system shows the areabehind the vehicle with guide lines. Sym-bol: indicates that the "reverse parking"function is active.The image from the rear view camera is avail-able throughout the maneuvering process.

X To switch the function mode for vehicleswith trailer tow hitch: using the controller,select symbol; for "Coupling up a trailer".Symbol; is highlighted.

To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-vates if you shift the transmission to P or afterdriving forwards a short distance.

Displays in the multimedia systemThe rear view cameramay show a distorted viewof obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.The rear view camera does not show objects inthe following positions:Rvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumper

Driving systems 143

Drivingandparking

Z

! Objects that are not at ground level appearfurther away than they actually are, e.g.:Rthe bumper of a parked vehicleRthe drawbar of a trailerRthe rear end of a truckRa post sticking up at an angleUse the guide lines for orientation only. Donot cross the lower guide linewhen approach-ing objects.

: Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of thevehicle

; White guide line without steering input –vehicle width including the exterior mirrors(static)

= Yellow guide line for the vehicle widthincluding the exterior mirrors, for currentsteering wheel angle (dynamic)

? Yellow lanes marking the course the tireswill take for current steering input (dynamic)

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-cle

B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)C Spare wheelD Red guide line at a distance of approximately

12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicleThe guide lines are shown when the transmis-sion is in position R.

The distance specifications only apply toobjects that are at ground level.

: Front warning display; Additional vehicle icon: PARKTRONIC meas-

urement operational readiness indicator= Rear warning displayVehicles with PARKTRONIC: when PARKTRONICis operational (Y page 140), additional meas-urement operational readiness indicator;appears in the multimedia system. If thePARKTRONIC warning displays are active orlight up, warning displays: and= are alsoactive or light up correspondingly in the multi-media system.

"Coupling up a trailer" function

: Trailer drawbarThis function is only available on vehicles with atrailer tow hitch.X Before coupling up a trailer, set the height oftrailer drawbar: so that it is slightly higherthan the ball coupling.

X Position the vehicle centrally in front of trailerdrawbar:.


: Red guide line at a distance of approximately12 in (0.30 m) from the ball coupling

; Trailer drawbar marker assistant= Trailer drawbar? Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" func-

tioni The trailer tow hitch is not visible in the mul-timedia system display, as the spare wheelcovers the ball coupling of the trailer towhitch.

X Select symbol? using the controller.The "Coupling up a trailer" function is selec-ted. The distance specifications now onlyapply to objects that are at the same level asthe ball coupling.

X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailerdrawbar locating aid; points approximatelyin the direction of trailer drawbar=.

X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar= rea-ches red guide line:. Do not drive any fur-ther.The distance between trailer drawbar= andred guide line: is now approximately 12 in(0.30 m).

X Couple up the trailer (Y page 151).

180° view

: Symbol for the 180° view function; Own vehicle= PARKTRONIC warning displaysYou can also use the rear view camera to selecta 180° view.When PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 140),a symbol for your own vehicle appears in themultimedia system. If the PARKTRONIC warningdisplays are active, warning displays= light upin the multimedia system in yellow or redaccordingly.

Off-road driving systems

Transfer case

General notesThe vehicle has permanent all-wheel drive. Thefront and rear axles are constantly driven.For further information on driving off-road, see(Y page 127).

Shift ranges

HIGHRANGE

Position for all normal on-road driving conditions

LOW RANGE Low-range position for drivingoff-road.Also for use on steep uphill ordownhill gradients, especiallywhen towing a trailer.The vehicle travels aroundhalf the speed of on-road driv-ing range HIGH RANGE. Thetractive power is correspond-ingly higher.

Off-road driving systems 145

Drivingandparking

Z

Shifting the transfer case

General notes

: Current shift range

: Indicator lamp; LOW RANGE button

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf you do not wait for the transfer case gearchange process to complete, the transfercase could remain in the neutral position. Thepower transmission to the driven wheels isthen interrupted. There is a danger of thevehicle rolling away unintentionally. There is arisk of an accident.Wait until the transfer case shift process iscompleted.

Do not switch off the enginewhile changing gearand do not shift the automatic transmission toanother gear.Always wait for the gear change process fromHIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE and from LOWRANGE to HIGH RANGE to complete. Do notswitch off the enginewhile changing gear and donot shift the automatic transmission to anothergear.

Switching on the off-road gear ratio! Proceed with the shifting process onlywhen:Rthe engine is runningRthe vehicle is rollingRthe automatic transmission is in selectorlever positioniRyou are not driving faster than 25 mph(40 km/h)

You could otherwise damage the transfercase.

X Make sure the ECO start/stop function isswitched off (Y page 106).

X Press LOW RANGE button;.Once the shifting procedure has been com-pleted, the LOW RANGE transfer case positionis shown in the multifunction display.Indicator lamp: lights up.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionD.

Switching off the off-road gear ratioG WARNINGIf you do not wait for the transfer case gearchange process to complete, the transfercase could remain in the neutral position. Thepower transmission to the driven wheels isthen interrupted. There is a danger of thevehicle rolling away unintentionally. There is arisk of an accident.Wait until the transfer case shift process iscompleted.

! Proceed with the shifting process onlywhen:Rthe engine is runningRthe vehicle is rollingRthe automatic transmission is in selectorlever positioniRyou are not driving faster than 43 mph(70 km/h)

You could otherwise damage the transfercase.

X Press button;.Once the shifting procedure has been com-pleted, the HIGH RANGE transfer case positionis shown in the multifunction display.Indicator lamp: goes out.

146 Off-road driving systemsDrivingandparking

If the shifting procedure is unsuccessful, themultifunction display may show the followingmessages:RTC Shift Conditions Not FulfilledYou have not met one or more shift condi-tions.RTC NEUTRAL OnThe transfer case has canceled the shiftingprocedure and is in position N.RTC Shift CanceledThe transfer case has canceled the gearchange process.

X Carry out the gear change process again.Make sure to meet all conditions for changinggears.RTC Malfunction Visit WorkshopThere is a malfunction in the transfer case.

X Do not shift the transfer case.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possibleat a qualified specialist workshop.

Shifting to neutralG WARNINGIf you do not wait for the transfer case gearchange process to complete, the transfercase could remain in the neutral position. Thepower transmission to the driven wheels isthen interrupted. There is a danger of thevehicle rolling away unintentionally. There is arisk of an accident.Wait until the transfer case shift process iscompleted.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.

X Apply the parking brake.X Depress the brake pedal.X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

X Press and hold LOW RANGE button; forapproximately ten seconds.When the shift procedure is complete, themultifunction display shows the TC NEUTRALOn message for five seconds.

If the shifting procedure is unsuccessful, themultifunction display may show the followingmessages (Y page 179).

If the transfer case is in Neutral, the SmartKeyis in the ignition lock and you open the driver'sdoor, the TC NEUTRAL On message appears inthemultifunction display. If you then release theparking brake, a warning tone will sound.

Differential locks

General notes

G WARNINGWhen the differential locks are engaged, ABS,4ETS, ESP® and BAS are deactivated. As aresult, the wheels could lock when brakingand the braking distance is increased. There isa risk of an accident.Disengage the differential locks immediatelyon firm surfaces with good grip.

! In order to avoid damage to the transfercase, you must operate the vehicle on a dyna-mometer (1-axle dynamometer) only if:Rthe axle not driven on is jacked uporRthe corresponding propeller shaft is dis-connected and the transfer case differen-tial lock is engaged.

Otherwise, the transfer case can be damaged.Differential locks improve the traction of thevehicle.Your vehicle is equipped with a differential lockeach for:Rthe transfer case: this controls the balancebetween the front and rear axles.Rthe rear axle: this controls the balancebetween the wheels on the rear axle.Rthe front axle: this controls the balancebetween the wheels on the front axle.

Information on differential gear systemand differential lockWhen the vehicle drives around a curve, thewheels on the outside of the curve must cover agreater distance. Therefore, the wheels turnmore rapidly than on the inside. The differential,a gear system in the drive train, allows for dif-fering rotational speeds and facilitates corner-ing.

Off-road driving systems 147

Drivingandparking

Z

The disadvantage of a differential is that thewheels that have the least grip, get the mostdrive. An example: a wheel of a driven axle is ona snow-covered surface and therefore does nothave any traction. The differential sendsmost ofthe drive force to this wheel because the forcetakes the route of the lowest resistance. Theopposite wheel on this axle, however, whichstands on firm ground and could therefore allowpropulsion, receives no driving power. 4ETScompensates for this disadvantage. 4ETS pro-vides good steerability by automatically brakingthe spinning wheel. 4ETS provides the wheel onthe firm surface with more drive force, which inturn provides propulsion.ESP® and 4ETS are traction systems that areideal for road driving and suitable for light off-road driving. The LOW RANGE off-road gearalso improves off-road capability.More challenging off-road conditions requireadditional measures such as locking one ormore differential.Your vehicle is equipped with three differentiallocks:Rfor the transfer caseRfor the front axleRfor the rear axleEach differential lock can be engaged with thecorresponding switch on the center console. Ifthe differential in the transfer case is locked, thefront and rear wheels rotate at the same speed.If the differential for the rear axle is locked, bothrear wheels rotate at the same speed, regard-less of their respective torque. Note, engagingthe differential lock greatly impairs the vehicle'ssteerability.Note, it is imperative to use the differential func-tion when driving on firm road surfaces. Underno circumstances should the differential belocked when driving on firm road surfaces. Oth-erwise, the vehiclemay not be steerable and youcould lose control of the vehicle. Therefore, onlyengage the differential lock when driving off-road. You should only engage the differentiallock if activating 4ETS and ESP® driving systemsand LOW RANGE off-road gear prove to beinsufficient.

Engaging the differential locks

General notesThe switches are located on the center console.

: Function indicator lamps (red); Differential lock for the front axle= Differential lock for the transfer case? Differential lock for the rear axleA Activation indicator lamps (yellow)Engage the differential locks:Roff-roadRto deactivate ABS, 4ETS, ESP® and BAS whileoff-roadRwhen fordingFor further information on driving off-road, see(Y page 127).You can engage the differential locks in the fol-lowing order:=,?,;.

Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen differential locks are engaged on a firm,high-grip surface, the vehicle's steerability isgreatly impaired. In particular, engaging thedifferential locks when cornering could leadto you losing control of the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.Disengage the differential locks immediatelyon firm surfaces with good grip.

G WARNINGWhen the differential locks are engaged, ABS,4ETS, ESP® and BAS are deactivated. As aresult, the wheels could lock when brakingand the braking distance is increased. There isa risk of an accident.

148 Off-road driving systemsDrivingandparking

Disengage the differential locks immediatelyon firm surfaces with good grip.

! Only engage the differential locks when:Ryou are driving at walking paceRthe drive wheels are not spinningRyou are not driving on a firm road surface

Differential lock for the transfer caseX To engage: switch the transfer case to theLOW RANGE off-road driving position(Y page 146).

X Press switch=.If the transfer case is in the LOW RANGE off-road position, the yellow activation indicatorlamp under switch= lights up.The å warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.If the differential is locked, the red functionindicator lamp above switch= lights up.In the multifunction display you see the:ABS Not Available DifferentialLocks Active message.The å!÷ warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster.The differential lock for the transfer case isengaged.4ETS, ESP®, BAS and ABS are deactivated.

The vehicle's ability to steer is severely restric-ted. Drive carefully and accelerate gently foroptimum traction.You can now engage the differential lock for rearaxle? and the differential lock for front axle;as required.

Differential lock for the rear axleX To engage: press switch?.Yellow activation indicator lampA lights upfirst, followed by red function indicatorlamp: of switch?.The differential lock for the rear axle isengaged.

Differential lock for the front axleX To engage: press switch;.First, the yellow activation indicator lamplights up, followed by the red function indica-tor lamp.

The differential lock for the front axle isengaged.

Disengaging the differential locksYou can disengage the differential locks in thefollowing order:;,?,=.X To simultaneously disengage all differen-tial locks: press switch=.Yellow activation indicator lampsA and redfunction indicator lamps: go out.After approximately three seconds of normaldriving, ABS, 4ETS, ESP® and BAS are activa-ted.The ABS Not Available DifferentialLocks Active message disappears in themultifunction display and the å, ! and÷ warning lamps in the instrument clustergo out.

X Shift the transfer case to the HIGH RANGEon-road position (Y page 146).

If red function indicator lamps: do not go outwhen disengaging the differential locks, stopthe vehicle safely in accordance with the trafficconditions and then drive on. The load changecan disengage the differential locks.

Towing a trailer


G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle/trailer combination beginsto lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehi-cle/trailer combination could even rollover.There is a risk of an accident.On no account should you attempt tostraighten up the vehicle/trailer combination

Towing a trailer 149

Drivingandparking

Z

by increasing the speed. Reduce vehiclespeed and do not countersteer. Apply thebrake as necessary.

G WARNINGIf you install a ball coupling other than the onedeliveredwith the vehicle, the trailer tow hitchand the rear axle may be overloaded. Thisapplies especially if the ball coupling in ques-tion is longer or angled differently. This couldseriously impair the driving characteristicsand the trailer can come loose. There is a riskof an accident.Only install the ball coupling delivered withthe vehicle or a ball coupling that is designedto meet your trailer towing requirements. Donot modify the ball coupling or the trailer towhitch.

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not installed correctly ornot secured with the bolt provided and thecorresponding spring cotter, the trailer maycome loose. There is a risk of an accident.Always install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed. Before every journey, ensure thatthe ball coupling is secured with the bolt andthe corresponding spring cotter.

! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,changes to the engine cooling systemmay benecessary, depending on the vehicle type.If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,observe the anchorage points on the chassisframe.

The installation of a trailer tow hitch is only per-missible if a towing weight is specified in yourvehicle documents. If this is not the case, thenthe vehicle is not approved for the towing of atrailer.For more information, please contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Please observe the manufacturer's operatinginstructions for the trailer coupling if a detach-able trailer coupling is used.Exceeding the maximum permissible nose-weight of the trailer drawbar on the ball couplingmay cause damage.

Damage may be caused to the following:RTowing vehicleRTrailerRBall couplingRTrailer tow hitchThe vehicle/trailer combination could becomeunstable.If the noseweight used is lower than the mini-mum permissible noseweight, the vehicle/trailer combination could also become unstable.To avoid hazardous situations:Rmake sure to check the noseweight beforeeach journeyRuse a drawbar noseweight as close as possi-ble to the maximum noseweightRdo not exceed the maximum permissiblenoseweightRthe noseweight must not be lower than theminimum permissible noseweight

Make sure that the following values are notexceeded:Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweightRthe permissible trailer loadRthe permissible rear axle load of the towingvehicleRthe maximum permissible gross vehicleweight of both the towing vehicle and thetrailer

When backing up the vehicle towards the trailer,make sure there is nobody between the trailerand the vehicle.The applicable permissible values, which mustnot be exceeded, can be found:Rin your vehicle documentsRon the type plate for the trailerRon the vehicle identification plateIf the values differ, the lowest value applies.You will find the values approved by the manu-facturer on the vehicle identification plates andthose for the towing vehicle under "Technicaldata" (Y page 284).When backing up the vehicle towards the trailer,make sure there is nobody between the trailerand the vehicle.Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If youdo not couple the trailer to the towing vehiclecorrectly, the trailer could become detached.

150 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking

When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonwith when driving without a trailer.The vehicle/trailer combination:Ris heavierRis restricted in its acceleration and gradient-climbing capabilityRhas an increased braking distanceRis affected more by strong crosswindsRdemands more sensitive steeringRhas a larger turning radiusThis could impair the handling characteristics.Adapt your driving style accordingly. Maintain asafe distance. Drive carefully.When towing a trailer, always adjust your speedto the current road and weather conditions. Donot exceed the maximum permissible speed foryour vehicle/trailer combination.

Notes on towing a trailer

General notesRDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed for vehicle/trailer combinations in therelevant country.This lowers the risk of an accident.ROnly install an approved trailer coupling onyour vehicle.Further information on availability and oninstallation is available from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suitablefor installing detachable trailer couplings.RDo not install hired trailer couplings or otherdetachable trailer couplings on the bumpersof your vehicle.RIf you do not need the ball coupling, removethe ball coupling from the ball couplingrecess. This will reduce the risk of damage tothe ball coupling.

When towing a trailer, set the tire pressure onthe rear axle of the towing vehicle for the max-imum load. Further information on the tire pres-sure table in the fuel filler flap (Y page 119).Please note that when towing a trailer,PARKTRONIC (Y page 140) and Blind SpotAssist (Y page 137) availability is limited or notavailable at all.

The height of the ball coupling changes with theload of the vehicle. If necessary, use a trailerwith a height-adjustable drawbar.You will find permissible trailer loads under"Technical data" (Y page 284).

Driving tipsX Observe the notes on ESP® trailer stabiliza-tion (Y page 60).

X On long and steep downhill gradients, selectshift range1,2 or3(Y page 114) in good time.This also applies if you have activated cruisecontrol or the speed limiter.

X If necessary, shift the transfer case to LOWRANGE (Y page 146).This will use the braking effect of the engine,so that less braking will be required to main-tain the speed. This relieves the load on thebrake system and prevents the brakes fromoverheating and wearing too quickly. If youneed additional braking, depress the brakepedal repeatedly rather than continuously.

The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type oftrailer. Before beginning the journey, check thetrailer's documents to see what the maximumpermitted speed is. Observe the maximum per-missible speed in the relevant country.For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maxi-mum permissible rear axle load is increasedwhen towing a trailer. See the "Technical data"section to find out whether this applies to yourvehicle (Y page 284). In the event of increasedrear axle load, the car/trailer combination maynot exceed a maximum speed of 60 mph(100 km/h) for reasons concerning the operat-ing permit. This also applies in countries inwhich the maximum permissible speed for car/trailer combinations is greater than 60 mph(100 km/h).When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparison towhen driving without a trailer and it will con-sume more fuel.


Drivingandparking

Z

Driving tipsRMaintain a greater distance from the vehiclein front than when driving without a trailer.RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gen-tly at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then,increase the braking force rapidly.RThe values given for gradient-climbing capa-bilities from a standstill refer to sea level.When driving in mountainous areas, note thatthe power output of the engine and, conse-quently, the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa-bility, decreases with increasing altitude.

If the trailer swings from side to side:X Do not accelerate.X Do not counter-steer.X Brake if necessary.

Assembling the ball coupling

G WARNINGThe ball coupling can be damaged if the nut onthe ball coupling is tightened using the incor-rect torque. As a result, the trailer maydetach. There is a risk of an accident.Immediately after installing, have the tighten-ing torque checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse ball couplings tested and approved foruse on Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This helps toavoid damage to the vehicle.Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions if you use a ball coupling otherthan the one supplied.

X Slide ball coupling: through the hole in ballcoupling carrier bar; to the stop.

X Slide lock washer? onto the thread of ballcoupling= to the stop.

X Screw on nutA as far as it will go.

X Using a torque wrench, tighten nutB with atorque of 516 lb-ft(700 Nm).

X Check that the length of overhanging threadC beneath nutB is at least 0.32 in(8 mm).

X Check that the assembled ball coupling hasbeen assembled correctly.

Also observe the height of the trailer couplingand the trailer manufacturer's instructions.Depending on the height of the trailer coupling,it may be necessary to rotate the ball couplingby 180° when assembling on the ball couplingcarrier bar. The assembly process is identical.

Installing the ball coupling

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not installed correctly ornot secured with the bolt provided and thecorresponding spring cotter, the trailer maycome loose. There is a risk of an accident.


Always install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed. Before every journey, ensure thatthe ball coupling is secured with the bolt andthe corresponding spring cotter.

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not correctly installedand secured, it can come loose during thejourney and endanger other road users. Thereis a risk of an accident and injury.Always install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed. Before every journey, ensure thatthe ball coupling is secured with the bolt andthe corresponding spring cotter.

X Pull protective cap= in the direction of thearrow, out of the ball coupling recess.

X Insert the ball coupling horizontally into ballcoupling recess? in the direction of thearrow.

X Make sure that the hole in ball couplingA isin line with the hole in ball coupling recessB.

X Slide boltC into the hole in the ball couplingrecess and the ball coupling to the stop.


Drivingandparking

Z

X Secure the bolt using spring cotterD.

Correctly installed and secured ball couplingX Check the ball coupling, bolt and spring cotterfor correct installation.

Coupling up a trailer! Do not connect the trailer's brake system (iffeatured) to the hydraulic brake system of thetowing vehicle, as the latter is equipped withan anti-lock brake system. Doing so will resultin a loss of function of the brake systems ofboth the vehicle and the trailer.

Observe the maximum permissible trailerdimensions (width and length).X Apply the vehicle's parking brake.X Make sure that the automatic transmission isset to position P.

X Position the trailer horizontally behind thevehicle.

X Couple up the trailer.X Establish the electrical connection betweenthe vehicle and the trailer.

X Check that the trailer lighting system is work-ing.

X Push the combination switch upwards/down-wards and check whether the correspondingturn signal on the trailer flashes.

A trailer that is connected is recognized onlywhen the electrical connection is establishedcorrectly and when the lighting system is work-ing properly. The function of other systems alsodepends on this, for example:RESP®RPARKTRONICThese restrictions apply to accessories that aresupplied with power via the trailer socket in yourvehicle, e.g. a rear bicycle rack.Observe the maximum permissible trailerdimensions (width and length).Most U.S. states and all Canadian provincesrequire by law:RSafety chains between the towing vehicle andthe trailer. The chains should be cross-woundunder the trailer drawbar. They must be fas-tened to the vehicle's trailer coupling, not tothe bumper or the axle.Leave enough play in the chains to make tightcornering possible.RA separate brake system for certain types oftrailer.RSafety switch for braked trailers. Check thespecific legal requirements applicable to yourstate.If the trailer becomes detached from the tow-ing vehicle, the safety feature brakes thetrailer.

Towing a trailerThere are several legal requirements for towinga trailer, e.g. the maximum permissible speed.Make sure that your car/trailer combinationcomplies with the local regulations:Rin your place of residenceRat your destinationThe police and local authorities can provide reli-able information.


In order to accumulate driving experience andaccustom yourself to the new handling charac-teristics, practice the following at a locationwhere there is no traffic:RCorneringRStoppingRBacking upBefore driving, check the following:RTrailer tow hitchRSafety switch for braked trailersRSafety chainsRElectrical connectionsRLighting systemRWheels and tiresRLoad-securing measuresAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide an unob-structed view of the rear section of the trailer.Trailers with electronically controlledbrakes: pull away carefully in the vehicle/trailercombination, brake manually using the brakecontroller and check whether the brakes func-tion correctly.Check the load securing measures on a regularbasis.When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonwith when driving without a trailer.The vehicle/trailer combination:Ris heavierRis restricted in its acceleration and gradient-climbing capabilityRhas an increased braking distanceRis affected more by strong crosswindsRdemands more sensitive steeringRhas a larger turning radiusAvoid sudden steering movements.Avoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gentlyat first to allow the trailer to run on. Then,increase the braking force rapidly.When overtaking, pay particular attention to theextended length of your vehicle/trailer combi-nation.Due to the length of the vehicle/trailer combi-nation, you require additional road space whenovertaking before you can change back to theoriginal lane.If the automatic transmission repeatedly shiftsbetween gears on uphill or downhill gradients,shift to a lower gear.

Driving in a lower gear and at a reduced speeddecreases the risk of engine damage.Avoid constant braking. Otherwise, the vehiclebrakes and possibly also the trailer brakes mayoverheat.When driving downhill, shift to a lower gear toutilize the engine's braking effect.If the coolant temperature increases dramati-cally while the air-conditioning system isswitched on, switch off the air-conditioning sys-tem.Coolant heat can also be dissipated by openingthe windows and switching the ventilationblower and the interior temperature to the high-est level.

Decoupling a trailer

G WARNINGIf you uncouple a trailer with the overrunbrake engaged, you could trap your handbetween the vehicle and the trailer drawbar.There is a risk of injury.Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrun brakeis engaged.

! Do not disconnect a trailer with an engagedoverrun brake. Otherwise, your vehicle couldbe damaged by the rebounding of the overrunbrake.

X Apply the parking brake.X Make sure that the automatic transmission isset to position P.

X Secure the vehicle and trailer against rollingaway.

X Close all doors, including the rear door.X Remove the trailer cable.X Remove the safety chains, if there are any.X Uncouple the trailer.

Permissible trailer and drawbar loads

Weight specificationsThe gross trailer weight is calculated as theweight of the trailer plus the weight of the loadand the trailer's equipment.


Drivingandparking

Z

You will find permissible trailer loads under"Technical data" (Y page 284).

Loading a trailerRWhen loading the trailer, make sure that nei-ther the permissible gross trailer weight northe permissible gross vehicle weight areexceeded. The permissible gross vehicleweight is indicated on the identification plateon the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehi-cle.You can find themaximum permissible valueson the type plates of your vehicle and thetrailer. When calculating how much weightthe vehicle and trailer may carry, pay atten-tion to the respective lowest values.RThe trailer drawbar load on the ball couplingmust be added to the rear axle load to avoidexceeding the permissible gross axle weight.The permissible gross vehicle weight is indi-cated on the identification plate on the B-pil-lar on the driver's side of the vehicle.

Mercedes-Benz recommends a trailer loadwhere the trailer drawbar noseweight accountsfor 8% to 15% of the permissible gross trailerweight.Additional accessories, passengers and loadreduce the permissible trailer load and nose-weight that your vehicle can tow.

Checking the vehicle and trailer weightRHave the towing vehicle, including the driver,passengers and load, and completely loadedtrailer weighed on a suitable weighingmachine. This will allow you to ensure that theweights of the towing vehicle and trailer com-ply with the maximum permissible values.RCheck the gross axleweight rating of the frontand rear axles, the gross weight of the trailerand trailer drawbar load.

Trailer power supply! You can connect accessories with a maxi-mum power consumption of 180 W to thepermanent power supply.Youmust not charge a trailer battery using thepower supply.

The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped atthe factory with a permanent power supply.

The permanent power supply is supplied viatrailer socket pin 9.A qualified specialist workshop can providemore information about installing the trailerelectrics.

Trailer with 7-pin connector

General notesTrailers with 7-pin connector: you canmake aconnection to the 13-pin connector on the ballcoupling using an adapter plug or, if necessary,an adapter cable. Both can be obtained in aqualified specialist workshop.

Installing the adapter! Make sure that there is enough slack in thecable for cornering so that the cable cannotbecome detached.

X Open the socket cover.X Insert the connector with lug: intogroove; on the socket and turn it clockwiseto the stop.

X Make the cover engage.X If you are using an adapter cable, secure thecable to the trailer with cable ties.

When the socket is connected, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated.



G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.

Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the on-board computer.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.

If the operating safety of your vehicle isimpaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.Contact a qualified specialist workshop.The on-board computer only showsmessages orwarnings from certain systems in the multifunc-tion display. You should therefore make sureyour vehicle is operating safely at all times.For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-tration (Y page 32).

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lightingThe brightness control knob is located on thebottom left of the instrument cluster(Y page 32).

X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise orcounter-clockwise.If the light switch is set to theÃ, T orL position, the brightness is dependentupon the brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness of themultifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 131):The segments light up from the stored speedto the end of the scale.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 134):One or two segments in the set speed rangelight up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:The segments between the speed of the vehi-cle in front and the stored speed light up.

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as thiscould damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-play indicates the temperature measured anddoes not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in the multi-function display (Y page 159).Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.

Displays and operation 157

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Coolant temperature gauge

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over

do not continue driving.The enginewill otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gage is in the instru-ment cluster on the right-hand side (Y page 32).Under normal operating conditions and with thespecified coolant level, the coolant temperaturemay rise to

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display; Switches on the Voice Control System (see

the separate operating instructions)= Right control panel

? Left control panelA Back buttonX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock(Y page 104).

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer using thebuttons on the multifunction steering wheel.

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the Audio menu: selects theprevious or next station, when thepreset list or station list is active,or an audio track or video sceneRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephone num-ber

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the Audio menu: selects a pre-set list or a station list in thedesired frequency range or anaudio track or video scene usingrapid scrollingRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:starts rapid scrolling if the phonebook is open

a RConfirms a selection/display mes-sageRIn the Tel (Telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andstarts dialing the selected number

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redial memory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

158 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

the markingH.

thethe markingH,

8 RMute

? RSwitches on the Voice Control Sys-tem (see the separate operatinginstructions)

Back button

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice ControlSystemRHides display messages/calls upthe last Trip menu function usedRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display in theTrip menu

Multifunction display

: Transmission position (Y page 110); Drive program (Y page 113)= Text field? Menu barA TimeB Outside temperature or speed

(Y page 165)C Transfer case position (Y page 145)

X To display menu bar?: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.If you do not press the buttons any longer,menu bar? is faded out after a few seconds.Text field= shows the selectedmenu or sub-menu and display messages.

Set the time using the multimedia system; seethe Digital Operator's Manual.The following messages may appear in the mul-tifunction display:Z Shift recommendation (Y page 115)¯ Cruise control (Y page 131)è ECO start/stop function

(Y page 106)LOWRANGE LOW RANGE off-road gear

(Y page 146)HIGHRANGE Transfer case position (Y page 145)

ë HOLD function (Y page 139)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewUsing the= or; button on the steeringwheel, open the menu bar.Operating the on-board computer (Y page 158).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTrip menu (Y page 160)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 161)RAudio menu (Y page 162)RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 163)RDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 164)RServ. menu (Y page 164)RSett. menu (settings) (Y page 164)RAMG menu in Mercedes-AMG vehicles(Y page 167)

Menus and submenus 159

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on the steer-ing wheel until the Tripmenu with trip odom-eter: and odometer; appears.

Trip computer "From start" or "Fromreset"

: Distance; Driving time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectFrom Start or From Reset.The values in the From Start submenu are cal-culated from the start of a journey whilst thevalues in the From Reset submenu are calcu-lated from the last time the submenu was reset(Y page 160).In the following cases, the From Start tripcomputer is automatically reset:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.The From Reset trip computer is automaticallyreset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or99,999 miles.

Range

: Approximate rangeX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select theapproximate range.

The approximate range that can be covereddepends on the fuel level and your current driv-ing style. If there is only a small amount of fuelleft in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refueledC appears instead of approximate range.

Digital speedometerX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer.A gearshift recommendation Z can also bedisplayed in the multifunction display.Observe the information on gearshift recom-mendation Z when shifting manually(Y page 115).

Resetting valuesX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Pressa.X Press the: button to select Yes and pressa to confirm.

You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computer

160 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions.Further information about navigation (see theDigital Operator's Manual).X Switch on the multimedia system (see theDigital Operator's Manual)

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Navi menu.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is announced, youwill see change-of-direction symbol= and dis-tance graphic;. The distance indicator short-ens towards the top of the display as youapproach the point of the announced change ofdirection.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Lanes not recommended? Recommended lane and new lane during a

change of directionA Change-of-direction symbolOn multilane roads, new lane recommendationscan be displayed for the next change of directionif the digital map supports this data. During thechange of direction, new lanes may be added.Lane not recommended=: you will not be ableto complete the next change of direction if youstay in this lane.Recommended lane and new lane during achange of direction?: in this lane you will beable to complete the next two changes of direc-tion without changing lane.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Other status indicators of the naviga-tion system

The navigation system displays additional infor-mation and the vehicle status.Possible displays:RNew Route... or Calculating Route...A new route is calculated.RRoad Not MappedThe vehicle position is inside the area of thedigital map, but the road is not recognized,e.g. new roads, parkings lots or private land.RNo RouteNo route could be calculated to the selecteddestination.RO

You have reached the destination or an inter-mediate destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Active station list; Station frequency with memory positionThe multifunction display shows station; withstation frequency or station name. The presetposition is only displayed alongwith station; ifthis has been stored.X Switch on the multimedia system and selectRadio.

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select a preset list or station list: pressand briefly hold the9 or: button until

the preset list or station list is shown in thedesired frequency range.

X To select a station: briefly press9or:.

SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a normalradio.Further information on radio mode (see the Dig-ital Operator's Manual).

Operating audio devices or media

Audio data from various audio devices or mediacan be played, depending on the equipmentinstalled in the vehicle.X Switch on the multimedia system and selectaudio CD or MP3 mode.


X To select the next/previous track: brieflypress the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list (rapidscrolling): press and hold the9 or:button until desired track: appears.If you press and hold the9 or: button,the rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not allaudio drives or data carriers support this func-tion.If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and title of the track.

Video DVD operation


-board

computerand

displays

X Switch on the multimedia system and selectvideo DVD.


X To select the next or previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired scene: hasbeen reached.

TV operation

The preset position is only displayed along withchannel: if this has been stored. You can storeTV channels in the multimedia system.X Switch on the multimedia system and selectTV.


X To select a stored channel: briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a channel from the channel list:press and briefly hold the9 or: but-ton.

Telephone menu

Introduction


When telephoning, you must observe the legalrequirements for the country in which you arecurrently driving.X Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-facturer’s operating instructions).

X Switch on the multimedia system (see theDigital Operator's Manual)

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection to themul-timedia system (see the Digital Operator'sManual).

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.

You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found a net-work and is ready to receive.RPhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searching fora network.

Accepting a callIf someone calls you when you are in the Telmenu, a display message appears in the multi-function display.You can accept a call at any time regardless ofthe menu selected.X Press the6 button on the steering wheelto accept an incoming call.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steering wheel.You can end or reject a call even if you are not inthe Tel menu.Dialing a number from the phone bookX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.

X Press9,: ora to switch to thephone book.

X Authorize access to the phone book on thephone.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.

orX To start rapid scrolling: press and hold9or: for longer than one second.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored fora name: press the6 ora button tostart dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name:press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.orX To exit the phone book: press the~ or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last names ornumbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to the redialmemory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.orX To exit the redial memory: press the~or% button.

Assistance menu

IntroductionIn the DriveAssistmenu, you have the follow-ing options:RDisplaying the assistance graphic(Y page 164)RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist(Y page 164)

Showing the distance displayX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press9 or: to select AssistanceGraphic.X Pressa.The DISTRONIC PLUS distance displayappears in the multifunction display.

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the DriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectBlind Spot Assist.X Pressa.The current selection appears.

X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.

For further information about Blind Spot Assist,see (Y page 137).

Service menuIn the Serv. menu, you have the followingoptions:RCalling up display messages (Y page 170)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 258)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 231)RChecking the engine oil level (Y page 227)

Settings menu

IntroductionIn the Sett. menu, you have the followingoptions:RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 165)RChanging the light settings (Y page 165)RChanging the vehicle settings (Y page 166)RChanging the convenience settings(Y page 166)RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 167)


-board

computerand

displays

Instrument cluster

Selecting the distance unitThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-tion allows you to choose whether certain dis-plays appear in kilometers or miles in the mul-tifunction display.You can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay shows certain messages in miles or kilo-meters.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer function.You will see the selected setting: km or miles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for distanceapplies to:Rdigital speedometer in the Trip menuRthe odometer and the trip odometerRthe trip computerRthe current consumption and the rangeRthe navigation instructions in the Navi menuRcruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRthe service interval display

Selecting permanent displayYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay permanently shows your speed or theoutside temperature.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent Display: function.You will see the selected setting: OutsideTemperature or Speedometer [mph].

X Press thea button to save the setting.

i The speed is displayed in mph.

Lights

Setting the daytime running lampsi This function is not available in Canada.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLights submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDaytime Running Lights function.If the Daytime Running Lights function hasbeen switched on, the cone of light and theW symbol are shown in red in the multi-function display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on daytime running lamps(Y page 85).

Surround lighting and exterior lightingdelayed switch-offX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLights submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theSurround Lighting function.When the Surround Lighting function hasbeen activated, the cone of light is shown inred in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.To activate exterior lighting delayed switch-offtemporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the SmartKeyto position 0 in the ignition lock (Y page 104).

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 104).Exterior lighting delayed switch-off is deacti-vated.

Exterior lighting delayed switch-off is reactiva-ted the next time you start the engine.If you have activated the Surround Lightingfunction and the light switch is set toÃ, thefollowing functions are switched on when it isdark:Rsurround lighting: the exterior lightingremains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. If you start the engine, thesurround lighting is switched off and auto-


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

matic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 86).Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: theexterior lighting remains lit for 60 secondsafter the engine is switched off. If you close allthe doors and the trunk lid, the exterior light-ing goes off after five seconds.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and exterior light-ing delayed switch-off are on, the followinglight up:RParking lampsRLow-beam headlampsRDaytime running lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Switching the interior lighting delayedswitch-off on/offIf you activate the Interior Lighting Delayfunction, the interior lighting remains on for20 seconds after you remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLights submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theInterior Lighting Delay function.If the Interior Lighting Delay functionhas been activated, the vehicle interior is dis-played in red in the multifunction display.


Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismIf you activate the Automatic Door Lock func-tion, the vehicle is centrally locked above aspeed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicle submenu.X Pressa to confirm.

X Press the: or9 button to select theAutomatic Door Lock function.When the Automatic Door Lock function isactivated, the vehicle doors are displayed inred in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.For further information on the automatic lockingfeature, see (Y page 67).

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, anacoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehi-cle.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicle submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic Lock function.If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,the& symbol in the multifunction displaylights up red.


Comfort

Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.


-board

computerand

displays

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theEasy Entry/Exit function.If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated,the vehicle steering wheel appears in red inthe multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature (Y page 80).

Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-ing feature on/offWhen you activate the Auto. Mirror Foldingfunction, the exterior mirrors are folded in whenthe vehicle is locked. If you unlock the vehicleand then open a door, the exterior mirrors foldout again.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAuto. Mirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror Folding function isactivated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is dis-played in red in the multifunction display.


: To fold the exterior mirrors in or outIf you have activated the Auto. Mirror Fold‐ing function and you fold the exterior mirrors inusing button:, they will not fold out automat-ically (Y page 82).You can then only fold out the exterior mirrorsusing button:.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory Setting submenu.X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings? display messageappears.

X Press the: or9 button to select No orYes.X Pressa to confirm the selection.If you have selected Yes and confirmed, themultifunction display shows a confirmationmessage.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningLights function in the Lights submenu is onlyreset if the vehicle is stationary.

AMGmenu inMercedes-AMG vehicles

AMG displays

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperatureB Transmission oil temperatureX Press= or; on the steering wheel toselect the AMG menu.

Upshift indicator UP= indicates that the enginehas reached the overrevving range when in themanual gearshift program. Upshift indicatorUP= fades out other messages until you haveshifted up.If the engine oil temperature is below 176 ‡(80 †), the oil temperature is shown in blue.Avoid driving at full engine output during thistime.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

SETUP

: Drive program (C/S/M); ESP® mode (ON/OFF)SETUP shows the drive program and the ESP®(Electronic Stability Program) mode.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.

X Press9 repeatedly until SETUP appears.

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMERThe RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the function onpublic roads.

: Lap; RACETIMERYou can start theRACETIMERwhen the engine isrunning or if the SmartKey is in position 2(Y page 104) in the ignition lock.X Press= or; on the steering wheel toselect the AMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theRACETIMER appears.

X To start: press thea button to start theRACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the= or; button to selectInterm. Time.X Pressa to confirm.The intermediate time is shown for five sec-onds.

Starting a new lap

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= LapX Pressa to confirm New Lap.i It is possible to store a maximum of sixteenlaps. The 16th lap can only be completed withFinish Lap.

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the% button on the steering wheel.X Confirm Yes witha.The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop thevehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 inthe ignition lock (Y page 104). If you turn theSmartKey to position 2 or 3 (Y page 104) andthen pressa to confirm Start, timing iscontinued.


-board

computerand

displays

Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER (Y page 168).X Press the= or; button to selectReset Lap.X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER isreset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. If youhave stopped 16 laps, the current lap does nothave to be reset.X Reset the current lap (Y page 169).X Pressa to confirm Reset.The Reset Race-Timer? display messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press the: button to select Yes and pressthea button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Overall statistics

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speedIf you save at least one lap and then stop RACE-TIMER, an overall evaluation is available.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation appears.

Lap statistics

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lapThis function is only available if you have storedat least two laps and have stopped the RACE-TIMER.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.

X Press9 repeatedly until a lap evaluationappears.Each lap appears in a separate submenu. Thefastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol:.

X Press the9 or: button to select a dif-ferent lap evaluation.

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunctiondisplay.Display messages with graphic displays may beshown in simplified form in the Operator's Man-ual and may therefore differ from the multifunc-tion display.Please respond in accordance with the displaymessages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied byan audiblewarning tone or a continuouswarningtone.When you stop and park the vehicle, pleaseobserve the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 139)RParking (Y page 120)

Display messages 169

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steeringwheel.The multifunction display hides the displaymessage.

High-priority display messages are shown in redin the multifunction display. Some high-prioritydisplay messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these mes-sages continuously until the causes for themes-sages have been remedied.

Message memory menuThe on-board computer saves certain displaymessages in themessage memory. You cancall up the display messages:X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Serv. menu.If there are display messages, the multifunc-tion display shows 2 Messages, for example.

X Press the9 or: button to select theentry, e.g. 2 Messages.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scrollthrough the display messages.

When the ignition is switched off, all displaymessages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes ofthe high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messagesare also deleted.

170 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

!÷ABS, ESP DefectiveVisit Workshop

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) are temporarily not available.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the display message remains on show:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷Currently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


÷ESP Defective VisitWorkshop

ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.

If the display message remains on show:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷JABS, ESP, EBD Defec‐tive Visit Workshop

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP® are malfunc-tioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunc-tion.In addition, the ÷,J and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lockif you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Please Release Park‐ing Brake

You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone alsosounds.X Release the parking brake.


-board

computerand

displays


$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 120).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Gmbrace Inoperative

USA only:one or more main functions of the mbrace system are mal-functioning.Canada only: one or more main functions of the TELE AID system aremalfunctioning.X USAonly: have thembrace system checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Canada only: have the Tele AID system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

6SRS Malfunction Ser‐vice Required

The restraint system is malfunctioning. The 6 warning lamp alsolights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 38).

6Front Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequiredorFrontRight MalfunctionService Required

The restraint system hasmalfunctioned at the front on the left or right.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


6Rear Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired or RearRight MalfunctionService Required

The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunctioned.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.


6Rear Center Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired

The rear center restraint systemhasmalfunctioned. The6warninglamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.


6Left Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionServiceRequiredorRightSide Curtain AirbagMalfunction ServiceRequired

The left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag is malfunctioning.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Front Passenger Air‐bag Disabled SeeOperator's ManualA BabySmart™ compatible child restraint system is installed on thefront-passenger seat.The 4 5 indicator lamp also lights up.The front-passenger air bag is therefore disabled.Further information on BabySmart™ (Y page 53).


-board

computerand

displays


Front Passenger Air‐bag Enabled SeeOperator's ManualThe 4 5 indicator lamp does not remain lit if a special Baby-Smart™-compatible child restraint system has been installed on thefront-passenger seat.The BabySmart™ system is malfunctioning.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag can be triggered unintentionally inthe event of an accident.There is a risk of an accident.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the childseat.

X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.X If the 4 5 indicator lamps do not light up, have the Baby-Smart™ system checked as soon as possible at a qualified special-ist workshop.Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the air bagdeactivation system has been repaired.

Radar Sensors DirtySee Operator's Man‐ualThe radar sensor system is malfunctioning.Possible causes are:RDirt on sensorsRHeavy rain or snowRWhen driving on inter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,e.g. in desert-like areas

At least one driving system is malfunctioning or temporarily unavail-able:RDISTRONIC PLUSA warning tone also sounds.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the driving sys-tems will be available again. The display message disappears.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 120).X Switch off the engine.X Clean all sensors (Y page 234).X Restart the engine.The display message disappears.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Lights


bExample:Check LeftLow Beam

The bulb in question is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.orX Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 88).

i LED light sources: the display message for the correspondinglamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed.

bMalfunction SeeOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAuto Lamp FunctionInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warningtone also sounds.X Turn the light switch to positionÃ.

Engine


+Check Coolant LevelSee Operator's Man‐ual

The coolant level is too low.X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 229).

X Have the coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshopif the coolant needs topping up more often than usual.

? The fan motor is malfunctioning.X At coolant temperatures below drive to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-tainous terrain and stop-start traffic.


-board

computerand

displays

the markingH,


?Coolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catchfire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhichcan occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 120).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until theengine has cooled down.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Donot start the engine again until the displaymessage goes out andthe coolant temperature is below Otherwise, theengine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to

The poly-V-belt may have torn.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Check the poly-V-belt.If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting theengine. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

the markingH

the markingH.

.


# The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Open the hood.X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:

! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4Check Engine Oil AtNext Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 227).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 228).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engineoil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

4Engine Oil LevelLow Stop VehicleTurn Engine Off

The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Add engine oil (Y page 228) and check the oil level (Y page 227).

4Check Engine OilLevel (Add 1 quart)

Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 227).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 228).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engineoil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).


-board

computerand

displays


4Engine Oil LevelCannot Be Measured

The measuring system is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

8Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems


TC Shift ConditionsNot FulfilledApply Brake/ParkingBrake

The parking brake has not been applied and the brake pedal has notbeen depressed. The transfer case has canceled the gear changeprocess and is inNeutral. There is no connection between the engineand the drive wheels.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Depress the brake pedal and apply the parking brake.X Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.X Make sure all conditions for changing gears are met (Y page 146).X Repeat the gearshift process.

TC MalfunctionVisit WorkshopApplyParking Brake toPark

There is a malfunction in the transfer case.X Do not shift the transfer case.X When parking, secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 120).X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

TC Shift CanceledPlease Reactivate

The transfer case has not performed the gear change process.X Repeat the gearshift process.X Make sure all conditions for changing gears are met (Y page 146).

TC shift conditionsnot fulfilledMax. Speed 25 mph

You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.X Drive more slowly.X Repeat the gearshift process.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


TC Shift ConditionsNot FulfilledSelect NEUTRAL Gear

You have not met one or more shift conditions.X Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.X Repeat the gearshift process.

TC Shift ConditionsNot FulfilledMax. Speed 40 mph

You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.X Drive more slowly.X Repeat the gearshift process.

LOW RANGEOn

The transfer case is in the LOW RANGE off-road position.

HIGH RANGEOn

The transfer case is in the HIGH RANGE on-road position.

Differential LocksAvailable Only InLOW RANGEThe LOW RANGE button has been pressed. The transfer case is in off-road driving position LOW RANGE and a differential lock is engaged.X Disengage the differential lock (Y page 120).X Repeat the gearshift process.

TC NEUTRALOn

The transfer case is in the Neutral neutral position.A warning tone will also sound when the driver's door is opened andthe brake pedal is not depressed.X Close the driver's door.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 120).X Shift the transfer case according to driving conditions(Y page 145).

Differential LockPreselectedESP Not Available

A differential lock was engaged. The differential gear system has notyet locked the respective differential. The activation indicator lamp(yellow) (Y page 120) of the switch lights up.ESP® is unavailable.ABS is still available.

Differential LocksActiveABS and ESP NotAvailable

A differential lock was engaged and the differential gear system hasnot yet locked the respective differential. The yellow activation indi-cator lamp and red function indicator lamp (Y page 120) on the switchlights up.ABS and ESP® are unavailable.


-board

computerand

displays


Blind Spot AssistCurrently Unavaila‐bleSee Operator's Man‐ual

Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Ryou have established the electrical connection between the trailerand your vehicle.Rthe sensors are dirtyRfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snowRthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.X When towing a trailer, confirm the display message witha.If you are driving without a trailer and the display message does notdisappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Apply the parking brake.X Clean the sensors (Y page 234).X Restart the engine.If the system detects that the sensors are fully operational, the displaymessage disappears.Blind Spot Assist is operational again.

Blind Spot AssistInoperative

Blind Spot Assist is faulty.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUSOff

DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 132).If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUSNow Available

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarilyunavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 132).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


DISTRONIC PLUSCurrently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual

DISTRONIC is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible cau-ses are:Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator trim is dirtyRfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snowRthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiationRthe system is outside the operating temperature rangeRthe transfer case is in the LOW RANGE transmission position.Rthe vehicle is on an uphill or a downhill slope of more than22‑25%Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Apply the parking brake.X Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator trim and thebumper (Y page 234).

X Restart the engine.If the system detects that the sensors are fully operational, the displaymessage disappears.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.

DISTRONIC PLUSInoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is malfunctioningBAS (anti-lock braking system) may also have failed.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUSSuspended

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 132).

Cruise Control- - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20mph (30 km/h), for example.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and storethe speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 131).


-board

computerand

displays

Tires


Tire pressure willbe displayed afterdriving a fewminutes

The tire pressure monitor is measuring the tire pressure.X Drive on.The tire pressures appear in themultifunction display after you havebeen driving for a few minutes.

Tire Press. MonitorInoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Moni‐tor Inoperative NoWheel SensorsThe wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. Thetire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving fora few minutes.

Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impaired

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 120).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 240).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 257).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z


Warning Tire Mal‐function The tire pressure in one ormore tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheelposition is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDriving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicleRyou could lose control of the vehicleRcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-upand possibly a fire

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 120).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 240).

Please Correct TirePressure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 257).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 259).

TirePress. Sen‐sor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in the mul-tifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-ist workshop.

Tire Press. MonitorCurrently Unavaila‐bleBecause there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, nosignals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressuremonitor is temporarily malfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been resolved.


-board

computerand

displays


hTire Pressure Warn‐ing, Tire Malfunc‐tion

The tire pressure in one ormore tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheelposition is shown on the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDriving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicleRyou could lose control of the vehicleRcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-upand possibly a fireThere is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 120).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 240).

hCheck Tire Pressure

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. Thewheel position is shown on the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impairedThere is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 120).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 240).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 257).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

hPlease Correct TirePressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 257).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Vehicle


Shift to 'P' or 'N'to Start Engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-tion R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Auxiliary BatteryMalfunction The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer beingcharged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before youswitch off the engine.

X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the parking brake.

Apply Brake toShift from 'P' You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to posi-tion D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

Apply Brake toSelect R You have attempted to shift from position D to position Rwithoutapplying the brake.X Depress the brake pedal.X Shift the transmission to position R.

A The rear door is open.

G WARNINGWhen the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle inte-rior if the tailgate is open.There is a risk of poisoning.X Close the rear door.

? The hood is open.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 120).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open.A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.


-board

computerand

displays


DPower Steering Mal‐function See Opera‐tor's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiverrange.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appearsin the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped belowthe minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 229).

SmartKey


ÂKey Does Not Belongto Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTake Your Key fromIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster

General notesSome systems carry out a self-diagnosis whenthe ignition is switched on. Therefore, some

indicator and warning lamps may light up orflash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical.These indicator and warning lamps only indicatea malfunction if they light up or flash after start-ing the engine or whilst driving.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 187

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety

Seat belts

Warning/indicatorlamp

N Signal typePossible causes/consequences andM Solutions

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten theirseat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 41).

ü N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, awarning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 41).The warning tone ceases.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as thedriver's or the front-passenger door is closed.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 41).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out.

ü N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warningsounds.The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15mph(25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 41).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven fasterthan 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secureplace.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.

188 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems



J N Canada only: the red brake system warning lamp is on while the engine isrunning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affec-ted.There is a risk of an accident.X If the multifunction display shows a display message, please observe this.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$J N$ (USA only): the red brake system warning lamp is on while the engine isrunning.J (Canada only): the yellow brake system warning lamp is lit while the engineis running.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect ismalfunctioning and the braking characteristicsmay beaffected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 120).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

$J N$ (USA only): the red brake system warning lamp is on while the engine isrunning.J (Canada only): the yellow brake system warning lamp is lit while the engineis running.A warning tone also sounds.There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 120).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z



! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning.If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution)is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, suchas the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ABS is temporarily unavailable.Other driving and driving safety systems may also be unavailable.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making gentle steering movementsat speeds of above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goesout.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays



! N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.You have engaged the differential locks. ABS is deactivated.X Disengage the differential locks.Subsequently ABS is reactivated.

$J÷!

N$ (USA only): the red brake system warning lamp and the yellow ESP® andABS warning lamps are on while the engine is running.J (Canada only): the yellow brake system, ESP® and ABSwarning lamps are onwhile the engine is running.ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-ple.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The brakingdistance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷ N The yellow ESP® warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of skidding or atleast one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 59), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 59).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z



å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.In rare cases (Y page 59), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.Observe the important safety notes on ESP® (Y page 59).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP®OFFwarning lamps are lit while the engine is running.ESP® is malfunctioning.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also malfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


-board

computerand

displays



÷å N The yellow ESP® and ESP®OFFwarning lamps are lit while the engine is running.ESP® is temporarily unavailable.Other driving and driving safety systems may also be unavailable.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listedabove.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making gentle steering movementsat speeds of above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goesout.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

å N The yellow ESP® OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The differential lock is engaged. ABS, ESP®, 4ETS and BAS have been deactivated.X Disengage the differential lock.ESP®, 4ETS and BAS are subsequently reactivated.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

FJ NF (USA only),J (Canada only): the red parking brake indicator lamp is litwhile the vehicle is in motion.You are driving with the parking brake applied.X Release the parking brake.The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.

6 N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.The restraint system is malfunctioning.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Drive on carefully.X Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the restraint system checked.For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 38).


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Engine



; N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergencymode.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.In some states, youmust immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as soonas the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal require-ments in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulationsapply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8 N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.In addition, the; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.

? N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and thecoolant temperature gauge is at the start of the scale.The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of enginedamage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 120).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.


-board

computerand

displays



? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked orthe electric engine radiator fan may be defective.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 120).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 229).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature gauge is below theHmarking (Y page 158). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrainand stop-and-go traffic.

? N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.The coolant temperature gauge has exceeded the H marking (Y page 158). Theairflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids whichmay have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occurjust by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attentionto road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 120).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine hascooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes(Y page 229).

X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,slush or ice.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z



X If the coolant temperature gauge is below theHmarking (Y page 158), drive onto the next qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrainand stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems



· N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is inmotion. A warningtone also sounds.You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line of travel at toohigh a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or takeevasive action.

Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 132).


-board

computerand

displays

Tires



h N The yellow tire pressuremonitorwarning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.The tire pressuremonitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.

G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-tion.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatlyimpairedThere is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle withoutmaking any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Payattention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 120).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire(Y page 240).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 257).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.


On-board

computerand

displays

Z

General notes

The multimedia system section in this Opera-tor's Manual describes the basic principles foroperation. More information can be found in theDigital Operator's Manual.



Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the multimedia system.The multimedia system calculates the route tothe destination without taking the following intoaccount, for example:Rtraffic lightsRstop and yield signsRparking or stopping restrictionsRroad narrowingRother road and traffic rules and regulationsThe multimedia system may give incorrect nav-igation recommendations if the actual street/traffic situation does not correspond with thedigital map's data.For example:Ra diverted routeRthe road layout or the direction of a one-waystreet has been changed

For this reason, you must always observe roadand traffic rules and regulations during yourjourney. Road and traffic rules and regulationsalways have priority over multimedia systemdriving recommendations.Navigation announcements are intended todirect you while driving without diverting yourattention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of con-sulting the map display for directions. Lookingat the icons ormap display can distract you fromtraffic conditions and driving, and increase therisk of an accident.This equipment complies with FCC radiationexposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.This equipment has very low levels of RF energythat is deemed to comply without maximumpermissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-ever, it is recommended to install it at a distanceof at least 8 inches (approx. 20 cm) between theradiation source and a person's body (notincluding limbs such as hands, wrists, feet andlegs).

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Function restrictions

For safety reasons, some functions are restric-ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.You will notice this, for example, because eitheryou will not be able to select certain menu itemsor a message will appear to this effect.

198 Function restrictionsMultim

ediasystem

Operating system

Overview

General notes! Do not use the space in front of the displayfor storage. Objects placed here could dam-age the display or impair its function. Avoidany direct contact with the display surface.Pressure on the display surface may result inimpairments to the display, which could beirreversible.

Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair yourability to read the display.The display has an automatic temperature-con-trolled switch-off feature. The brightness isautomatically reduced if the temperature is toohigh. The display may temporarily switch offcompletely.

Cleaning instructions! Do not touch the display. The display has avery sensitive high-gloss surface; there is arisk of scratching. If you have to clean thescreen, however, use a mild cleaning agentand a soft, lint-free cloth.

The display must be switched off and havecooled down before you start cleaning. Do notapply pressure to the display surface whencleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam-age to the display.

Switching the multimedia systemon/offX Press the q control knob.

Adjusting the volumeX Turn the q control knob.The volume is adjusted:Rfor the currently selected media sourceRduring traffic or navigation announcementsRin hands-free mode during an active call

Switching the sound on or offX Press the8 button on the control panel.If the audio output is switched off, the statusline will show the8 symbol. If you switch

themedia source or set the volume, the soundis automatically switched on.i Navigation announcements will be heardeven if the sound is muted.

FunctionsThe multimedia system has the following func-tions:RRadio modeRMedia mode with media searchRSound systemsRNavigation systemRCommunication functionsRSIRIUS WeatherRVehicle functions with system settingsRFavorites functions

ControllerThe controller in the center console lets you:Rselect menu items on the displayRenter charactersRselect a destination on the mapRsave entriesThe controller can be:Rturned3Rslid left or right1Rslid forwards or back4Rslid diagonally2Rpressed briefly or pressed and held7

Back buttonYou can use the% button to exit amenu or tocall up the basic display of the current operatingmode.X To exit the menu: briefly press the%button.The multimedia system changes to the nexthigher menu level in the current operatingmode.

X To call up the basic display: press the%button for longer than two seconds.The multimedia system changes to the basicdisplay of the current operating mode.

Operating system 199

Multim

ediasystem

Z

Favorites

Calling up and exiting favoritesX To call up: press theg button on the con-troller.

X Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle.The favorites are displayed.

X To exit: press theg button again.

Adding favorites

Adding predefined favorites

: Adds a new favorite; Renames a selected favorite= Moves a selected favorite? Deletes a selected favoriteX Press theg button.X Slide6 the controller.The menu bar is shown.

X Select Reassign.The categories are displayed.

X Select a category.The favorites are displayed.

X Select a favorite.X Add a favorite at the desired position.If a favorite has already been added at thisposition, it will be overwritten.

Adding your own favoritesYou can add climate control as a favorite, forexample.X Select VehicleQClimate Control.X Press and hold theg button until thefavorites are displayed.

X Add a favorite at the desired position.If a favorite has already been added at thisposition, it will be overwritten.

Navigation mode



Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the navigation system.

General notesAmong other things, correct functioning of thenavigation systemdepends onGPS reception. Incertain situations, GPS reception may beimpaired, there may be interference or theremay be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels orparking garages.Further information can be found in the DigitalOperator's Manual.

Selecting a route type and route optionsMultimedia system:X Select NaviQNavigation.Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller.X Select OptionsQRoute Settings.Notes for route types:REco RouteRDynamic Traffic RouteTraffic reports on the route for the route guid-ance are taken into account (not available inall countries).RDynamic TRF. Route After RequestYou can decide whether or not current trafficreports should be included in the route cal-culation (not available in all countries).RCalculate Alternative Routes

200 Operating systemMultim

ediasystem

Different routes are being calculated. In orderto do so, instead of Start, select the menuitem Continue.

X To avoid/use route options: select AvoidOptions.

X Select a route option.Notes for route options:RUse Toll RoadsThe route calculation includes roads whichrequire you to pay a usage fee (toll).RNumber of Occupants in the Vehicle:(only available in the USA)Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the accessconditions for carpool lanes.Carpool lanes will be included if the carpoollanes option is activated.

Entering an addressMultimedia system:X Select NaviQNavigation.Themap shows the vehicle's current position.

X Slide6 the controller.X Select DestinationQAddress Entry.Enter an address, e.g. as follows:Rcity or ZIP code, street, house numberRstate/province, city or ZIP codeRcity or ZIP code, centerRstreet, city or ZIP code, intersectionX Select City.The city in which the vehicle is currently loca-ted (current vehicle position) is at the top.Below this, you will see locations for whichroute guidance has already been carried out.

X Enter the city.TheG symbol: the location is contained onthe digital map multiple times.

X To switch to the list: slide5 the control-ler.

X Select the location.If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there aredifferent ZIP codes available for the location,the corresponding digits are displayedwith anX.

X Enter the street and house number.The address is in the menu.

Further options for destination entry:Rsearch for a keyword

The keyword search finds destinations usingfragments of words.Rselect the last destinationRselect a contactRselect a POIYou can search for a POI by location, name ortelephone number.Rselect destination on the mapRenter intermediate destinationYou can map the route to the destinationyourself with up to four intermediate destina-tions.Rselect destinations from Mercedes-BenzAppsRselect geo-coordinates

Calculating the routePrerequisite: the address has been entered andis in the menu.X Select Start or Continue.The route is calculatedwith the selected routetype and the selected route options.If route guidance has already been activated,a prompt will appear asking whether you wishto end the current route guidance.

X Select Cancel Active Route Guidance orSet as Intermediate Destination.Cancel Active Route Guidance cancelsthe current route guidance and starts routecalculation to the new destination.Set as Intermediate Destination addsthe new destination in addition to the existingdestination and opens the intermediate des-tinations list.

Connecting a mobile phone

RequirementsFor telephony via the Bluetooth® interface, yourequire a Bluetooth®-capablemobile phone. Themobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile1.0 or above.Multimedia system:X Select VehicleQSystem Set‐tingsQActivate Bluetooth.X Activate Bluetooth® O.


Multim

ediasystem

Z

Mobile phone:X Activate Bluetooth® and, if necessary, Blue-tooth® visibility for other devices (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).

The Bluetooth® device names for all of oneman-ufacturer's products might be identical. Tomake it possible to clearly identify your mobilephone, change the device name (see the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (PhoneBook Access Profile) and MAP (MessageAccess Profile) Bluetooth® profiles, the follow-ing information will be transmitted after youconnect:RPhone bookRCall listsRText messages and e-mail

i Further information on suitable mobilephones can be found at: http://www.mercedes-benz.com/connect

i In the USA, you can get in touch with theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centeron 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.

Searching for and authorizing (connect-ing) a mobile phoneBefore using your mobile phone with the multi-media system for the first time, you will need tosearch for the phone and then authorize (con-nect) it. Depending on themobile phone, author-ization either takes place by means of SecureSimple Pairing or by entering a passkey. Themultimedia system automatically makes theprocedure that is relevant for yourmobile phoneavailable. The mobile phone is always connec-ted automatically after authorization. Furtherinformation on using a mobile phone with themultimedia system (see the Digital Operator'sManual).If the multimedia system does not detect yourmobile phone, this may be due to particularsecurity settings on your mobile phone (see themanufacturer's operating instructions).Only one mobile phone can be connected to themultimedia system at any one time.Searching for a mobile phone

Multimedia system:X Select Tel/®QConn.DeviceQSearch for PhonesQStartSearch.The available mobile phones are displayed.

Symbols in the device list

Sym-bol

Explanation

Ï New mobile phone found, not yetauthorized.

Ñ Mobile phone is authorized, but isnot connected.

# Mobile phone is authorized andconnected.

Connecting a mobile phoneAuthorization using Secure Simple Pairing:X Select mobile phone.A code is displayed in the multimedia systemand on the mobile phone.

X If codesmatch: select Yes on themultimediasystem.

X Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-ing on the mobile phone used, confirm theconnection to the multimedia system and forthe PBAP and MAP Bluetooth® profiles. Theprompt to confirm may take up to twominutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-er's operating instructions).

X If the codes are different: select No on themultimedia system.The process is canceled.Repeat authorization.

Authorization by entering a passkey (passcode):X Select the Bluetooth® name of the mobilephone.The input menu for the passkey is displayed.

X Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-nation as a passkey.

X Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.X Press ¬ to confirm.X Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobilephone. Depending on the mobile phone used,confirm the connection to themultimedia sys-tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth®profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up

202 Operating systemMultim

ediasystem

to two minutes to be displayed (see the man-ufacturer's operating instructions).

Switching between mobile phonesIf you have authorized more than one mobilephone, you can switch between the individualphones.Multimedia system:X Select Conn. Device.X Select a mobile phone from the device list.

Media mode

General notesIf you wish to play external media sources, thedefault display must already be turned on. Fur-ther information on media mode (see the DigitalOperator's Manual).The following external media sources can beused:RApple® devices (e.g. iPhone®)RUSB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)(Y page 203)RCDRDVD videoRSD cardsRvia devices connected by Bluetooth®

i Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVDchanger (see the Digital Operator's Manual).

Selecting using the device listMultimedia system:X Select MediaQDevices.The available media sources will be shown.The # dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the media source.Playable files are played.

Inserting/removing an SD card

Important safety notesG WARNINGSD cards are small parts. They can be swal-lowed and cause choking. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.

Keep the SD card out of the reach of children.If a SD card is swallowed, seek medical atten-tion immediately.

! If you are no longer using the SD card, youshould remove it and store it outside the vehi-cle. High temperatures can damage the card.

Inserting an SD cardThe SD card slot is located on the control panel.X Insert the SD card into the SD card slot untilthe SD card engages. The side with the con-tacts must face down.

Removing an SD cardX Press the SD card.The SD card is ejected.

X Remove the SD card.

Connecting USB devices

X Connect the USB device to the USB port.There are twoUSB ports in the stowage spaceunder the armrest.

X Select the media source (Y page 203).


Multim

ediasystem

Z

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGIf you distribute the load unevenly in the vehi-cle, the handling as well as the steering andbraking characteristics are severely affected.There is a risk of an accident.Distribute the load evenly in the vehicle.Secure the load to prevent it from slipping.

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.


Driving, braking and steering characteristicschange depending on:Rtype of loadRweightRthe center of gravity of the loadYou should therefore load your vehicle as shownin the illustrations.The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicleweight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, sparewheel, accessories installed, vehicle occupantsand luggage/load.Do not exceed the load limit or permitted grossvehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle.The load limit andGVWRare given on the vehicleidentification plate found on the driver's door B-pillar.Furthermore, the load must be distributed insuch a way that the weight on each axle neverexceeds the gross axle weight rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axles. The relevant GVWR andGAWR information can be found on the vehicleidentification plate on the driver's side B-pillar.Further information can be found in the "Loadingthe vehicle" section (Y page 260).Observe the following notes when transportinga load:RPosition heavy loads as far forward as possi-ble and as low down in the cargo compart-ment as possible.RTransport loads when possible in the cargocompartment. You should only use the cargocompartment enlargement if the load doesnot fit in the cargo compartment.

204 Loading guidelinesStow

ageandfeatures

RAlways place the load against the backrests ofthe front seats or rear seats.RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcelnets to transport loads and luggage.RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening mate-rials appropriate for the weight and size of theload.

If the rear bench seat is not occupied:X Insert the belt tongue on the outer seat beltsinto the buckle of opposite seat belt:.

X Secure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie downs.

X Pad sharp edges for protection.

Stowage areas

Stowage spaces


G WARNINGIf you transport objects in the vehicle interiorand these are not adequately secured, theycould slip or be flung around and therebystrike vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobilephone brackets may not always be able tohold the objects placed in them in the event ofan accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sharp braking or suddenchanges of direction.

RAlways stow objects in such a way that theycannot be tossed about in these or similarsituations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude out of the stowage spaces, luggagenets or stowage nets.REnsure that closable stowage spaces areshut before beginning your journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects inthe cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 204).

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X To open: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; up until itengages.

1 Glove box unlocked2 Glove box locked

Stowage areas 205

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock (Y page 64) and turn it 90° clockwise toposition2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into thelock (Y page 64) and turn it 90° counter-clockwise to position1.

The glove box can only be locked and unlockedusing the mechanical key.

Door stowage compartment

: Door stowage compartmentThere is an additional compartment located onthe driver's door trim.

Stowage compartment under the armrestin the center console

: Small stowage compartment; Release button for the armrestX To open: press release button;.X Fold up armrest.X To close:fold the armrest down.The armrest engages audibly.

Stowage space in the rear

Storage pocketsG WARNINGStorage bags are intended for storing light-weight items only.Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges orfragile objects may not be transported in thestorage bag. In an accident, during hard brak-ing, or sudden maneuvers, they could bethrown around inside the vehicle and causeinjury to vehicle occupants.Storage bags cannot protect transportedgoods in the event of an accident.

The stowage pockets are located on the rearside of the front seats.

Stowage netsThe following additional stowage areas are avail-able in the vehicle:Rstowage net in the front-passenger footwellRmap pockets on the back of the driver's andfront-passenger seatRstowage net on the left-hand side in the cargocompartment

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 204)and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces(Y page 205).

Cargo compartment enlargement


G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for-wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intended

206 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

level of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-partment cannot be restrained by the seatbackrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.


! Ensure that you remove all containers fromthe cup holder in the rear before folding theseat backrest and the seat cushion of the rearbench seat forwards.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 204).The rear bench seat is split symmetrically.The left-hand and right-hand rear bench seatscan be folded forward to increase the capacityof the rear compartment. You can:Rfold the seat backrests forwardRfold the rear bench seat back fully

Folding the seat backrest forward

X Remove the center head restraint(Y page 77).

X Pull release: in the direction of the arrow.The corresponding seat backrest is released.

X Fold the backrest forward.The seat backrest engages audibly.

; Seat backrest folded forward

Folding the seat backrest back! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-aged.

X Pull release lever:.The corresponding seat backrest is released.

X Fold backrest; back in the direction of thearrow.The seat catch engages audibly.

X Install the head restraint (Y page 77)

Stowage areas 207

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Rear bench seat

Folding the rear bench seat forward

X Fold the rear seat backrest forward(Y page 207).

X Pull the release in the direction of arrow:.The corresponding rear bench seat isreleased.

X Fold rear bench seat; forward.

; Rear bench seat folded forward

Folding the rear bench seat into anupright positionG WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for-wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intended

level of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-partment cannot be restrained by the seatbackrest.

There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.

X Fold the rear bench seat back.The seat catch engages audibly.

X Fold the backrest back (Y page 207).X Install the head restraints (Y page 77).

Securing loads

Important safety notesDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down ringsevenly.Do not tamper with or repair cargo tie-downpoints, cargo tie-down rings or tie downs. Havemaintenance work as well as modifications,installations and conversions carried out at aqualified specialist workshop (Y page 27).Observe the following notes on securing loads:RObserve the loading guidelines (Y page 204).RSecure the load using the cargo tie-downrings.RDistribute the load on the cargo tie-downrings evenly.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure aload, as these are only intended as an anti-slipprotection for light loads.RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges orcorners.RPad sharp edges for protection.ROnly use tie downs that have been checked inaccordance with applicable standards, e.g.lashing nets or lashing straps.RFill the spaces between the load and thecargo compartment walls and the wheelhousing in a form-locking way. Only usedimensionally stable transportation aids forthis, such as chocks, wooden fixings or pad-ding.

208 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Cargo tie-down rings in the cargo com-partment

: Cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compart-ment

Cargo compartment cover


G WARNINGOn its own, the cargo compartment covercannot secure or restrain heavy objects,items of luggage and heavy loads. You couldbe hit by an unsecured load during suddenchanges in direction, braking or in the event ofan accident. There is an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing tie downs, even if you are using thecargo compartment cover.

! When loading the vehicle, make sure thatyou do not stack the load in the cargo com-partment higher than the lower edge of theside windows. Do not place heavy objects ontop of the cargo compartment cover.

The cargo compartment cover is secured behindthe rear bench seat backrest.

Opening and closing the cargo compart-ment cover

X To open: pull cargo compartment cover:back and clip it into the retainers on the leftand right of the rear door.

X To close: unclip cargo compartment cover:and guide it forward until it is completely rol-led up.

Installing/removing the cargo compart-ment cover

X To remove: make sure that cargo compart-ment cover; is rolled up.

X Slide catch: on both sides to the center ofthe vehicle.

X Swing cargo compartment cover; up.X To install: slide catches: to the center ofthe vehicle.

X Insert cargo compartment cover; into therecesses of the side trim panel.

X Press the left and right-hand side of cargocompartment cover; down until the cargocompartment cover engages.

X Slide catches: towards the side trim panel.

Stowage areas 209

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Features

Cup holder


G WARNINGIf you transport objects in the vehicle interiorand these are not adequately secured, theycould slip or be flung around and therebystrike vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobilephone brackets may not always be able tohold the objects placed in them in the event ofan accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sharp braking or suddenchanges of direction.RAlways stow objects in such a way that theycannot be tossed about in these or similarsituations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude out of the stowage spaces, luggagenets or stowage nets.REnsure that closable stowage spaces areshut before beginning your journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects inthe cargo compartment.

! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. The drinkscould otherwise spill.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 204).

Cup holder on the center console

X Fold cup holder: all the way up.

Cup holders in the rear compartment! Ensure that you remove all containers fromthe cup holder in the rear before folding theseat backrest and the seat cushion of the rearbench seat forwards.

: Cup holder

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Sun visor; Retainer= Mirror cover? Mirror light

210 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Vanity mirror in the sun visor

: Sun visor; Retainer= Mirror cover? Mirror lightMirror lights? will only function if sun visor:is clipped into bracket;.X Fold down sun visor:.X Fold up mirror cover=.Mirror lights? are switched on automati-cally.

Glare from the side

: Sun visor; Retainer= Mirror cover? Mirror lightX Fold down sun visor:.X Pull sun visor: from bracket;.X Swing sun visor: to the side.

Stowage compartment/ashtray

Stowage compartment/ashtray in thecenter console

G WARNINGIf you engage transmission position D whenremoving the ashtray insert, the vehicle canroll away. There is a risk of an accident.Always switch off the engine first and safe-guard the vehicle against rolling away byapplying the parking brake.

: Cover; InsertOn new vehicles, insert; is stored in the glovebox. Install the insert before using the ashtray.X To open: press cover: and then release it.The ashtray opens.

X To remove the insert: make sure that theengine is switched off and that the parkingbrake has been applied to secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

X Move the selector lever toi.X Press down cover:.Insert; is released.

X Pull insert; up and remove it.X To install the insert: install insert; fromabove.

X Push insert; down.Insert; audibly engages.

X To close: close cover: fully.The ashtray is lit up if the low-beam headlampsare on.

Features 211

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Ashtray in the rear compartment

X To open: fold cover; out in the direction ofthe arrow.

X To remove the insert: press retaining lug:and pull insert= up and out.

X To install the insert: install insert= fromabove.

X To close: close cover; fully.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

! The 12 V socket in the cigarette lighter canbe used for accessories (up to a maximum of180 W), as long as they have the standardsocket type for cigarette lighters.Note that the socket in the cigarette lightercan be damaged when connecting accesso-ries, for example by:Rfrequent insertion and removalRsockets that do not fit correctly

A damaged socket can cause the cigarettelighter to stop working.

X Press in cigarette lighter:.Cigarette lighter:will pop out automaticallywhen the heating element is red-hot.

12 V sockets

General notes! If you are simultaneously using all threesockets in the vehicle, make sure that you donot exceed the maximum current draw of45 A. Otherwise, you will overload the fuses.

The sockets can be used for accessories with amaximum current draw of 180 W (15 A) each,e.g. chargers for mobile phones.If you use the sockets for long periods when theengine is switched off, the battery may dis-charge.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni-tion lock.

Socket in the front-passenger footwell

X Lift up the cover of the socket.

212 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

The cigarette lighter socket can be also used(Y page 212). This is the case even if the Smart-Key has been removed from the ignition lock.

Socket in the rear compartment

X Lift up the cover of the socket.

Socket in the cargo compartment

The socket is located in the cargo compartmenton the left-hand side, when viewed in the direc-tion of travel, next to the rear door.X Lift up the cover of the socket.

115 V socket


G DANGERWhen a suitable device is connected, the115 V power socket will be carrying a highvoltage. You could receive an electric shock ifthe connector cable or the 115 V powersocket is pulled out of the trim or is damagedor wet. There is a risk of fatal injury.

RUse only connector cables that are dry andfree of damage.RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the115 V power socket is dry.RHave the 115 V power socket checked orreplaced immediately at a qualified speci-alizedworkshop if it is damagedor has beenpulled out of the trim.RNever plug the connector cable into a 115Vpower socket that is damaged or has beenpulled out of the trim.

G DANGERIf you reach into the power socket or pluginappropriate devices into the power socket,you could receive an electric shock. There is arisk of fatal injury.Only connect appropriate devices to thepower socket.

! Note that work and repairs on the 115 Vpower socket should only be carried out byqualified specialist personnel.

General notesThe 115 V power socket provides an alternatingvoltage of 115 V so that small electronic devicescan be connected. These devices, such asgames consoles, chargers and laptops,must notconsume more than a maximum of 150 wattsaltogether.Requirements for operation of these devices:Rthe electronic device that you connect has asuitable connector and conforms to stand-ards specific to the country you are in.Rthe plug of the electronic device is pluggedcorrectly into 115 V power socket.Rthe maximum wattage of the device to beconnected must not exceed 150 watts.Rthe on-board power supply is within a permis-sible voltage range.Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartment andthe cargo compartment are operational.

Features 213

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Using the 115 V power socket X To switch on: switch the ignition on.X Open flap:.X Insert the plug of the electronic device into115 V power socket;.Indicator lamp= lights up.

X To switch off: disconnect the plug from115 V power socket;.Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

Problems with the 115 V power socket


The warning lamp on the115 V power socket isnot lit.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak.X Start the engine.orX Charge the battery (Y page 243).If the indicator lamp still does not light up:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high.X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket.X Let the DC/AC converter cool down.If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down theconverter:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You have connected an electronic device that has a constant nominalpower of less than 150 watts, but has a very high switch-on current.This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 115 Vpower socket will not supply it with power.X Connect a suitable electronic device.

mbrace

General notesThe mbrace system is only available in the USA.You must have a license agreement to activatethembrace service. Make sure that your systemis activated and operational. To register, pressthe ï Info call button. If any of the stepsmentioned are not carried out, the system maynot be activated.

If you have questions about the activation, con-tact one of the following telephone hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or1-866-990-9007Shortly after successfully registering with thembrace service, a user ID and password will besent to you by mail. You can use this passwordto log onto the mbrace area under "OwnersOnline" at http://www.mbusa.com.

214 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer CenterRa service subscription is availableDetermining the location of the vehicle on amapis only possible if:RGPS reception is availableRthe vehicle position can be forwarded to theCustomer Assistance Center

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceed asfollows:X Press theW orX button on the multi-function steering wheel.

orX Use the multimedia system volume control.The system offers various services, e.g.:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRInfo callYou can find information and a description of allavailable features under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, the sys-tem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has been detectedif one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does notcome on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in theï Info call buttondoes not light up during the system self-diag-nosis

RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-lowing buttons continues to light up red afterthe system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- Info call buttonïRafter the system self-diagnosis, the Inoper‐ative or Service Not Activatedmessageappears in the multifunction display.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,the system may not operate as expected. In theevent of an emergency, help will have to besummoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestMercedes-Benz Service Center or contact thefollowing service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or1-866-990-9007

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.Move to a safe location along with other vehi-cle occupants. In such situations, secure thevehicle in accordance with national regula-tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.

General notesObserve the notes on system activation(Y page 214).An emergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-

Features 215

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

gered. You cannot end an automatically trig-gered emergency call yourself.An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been initi-ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting Call messageappears in the multifunction display.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, the CallConnected message appears in the multifunc-tion display.All important information on the emergency istransmitted, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicle (as determinedby the GPS system)RVehicle identification numberRInformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has been initi-ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-lished between theCustomer AssistanceCenterand the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerattempts to get more information on theemergency.Rif there is no response from the vehicle occu-pants, an ambulance is immediately sent tothe vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,the system has been unable to initiate an emer-gency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. The indi-cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu-ously.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.

X Press and hold the SOS button for at least onesecond;.The indicator lamp in SOS button; flashesuntil the emergency call is concluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.If the mobile phone network is unavailable,mbrace will not be able to make the emergencycall. If you leave the vehicle immediately afterpressing SOS button;, you do not know ifmbrace has successfully made the emergencycall. In this case, always summon assistance byother means.

Roadside Assistance button

X To call: press Roadside Assistance but-ton:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active. TheConnecting Call message appears in the

216 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

multifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, theCall Connec‐ted message appears in the multifunction dis-play.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe multimedia system display indicates that acall is active. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-ton on the multimedia system, for example.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.From the remote malfunction diagnosis, theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercan ascertain the nature of the problem(Y page 220).The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-ter either sends a qualifiedMercedes-Benz tech-nician or makes arrangements for your vehicleto be transported to the nearest Mercedes-BenzService Center.You may be charged for services such as repairwork and/or towing.You can find more information in the separatembrace manual.The system has not been able to initiate a Road-side Assistance call, if:Rthe F indicator lamp for the RoadsideAssistance call button is flashing continu-ously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-work is not available, for example.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding multimedia systembutton for ending a phone call.

Info call button

X To call: press Info call button:.This initiates a call to theMercedes-Benz Cus-tomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Info call button:flashes while the connection is being made.The Connecting Call message appears inthe multifunction display. The audio output ismuted.

If a connection can be made, theCall Connec‐ted message appears in the multifunction dis-play.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberThe multimedia system display indicates that acall is active. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-ton on COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available in this case.A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerand the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest Mercedes-Benz Ser-vice Center and about other products and serv-ices from Mercedes-Benz.You can find further information on the mbracesystem under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Features 217

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

The system has not been able to initiate an MBInfo call, if:Rthe indicator lamp in the ï Info call buttonis flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center was estab-lished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-work is not available, for example.The Call Failedmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding multimedia systembutton for ending a phone call.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or Info calls, an emergency call canstill be initiated. In this case, an emergency callwill take priority and override all other activecalls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on themultifunction steeringwheelRthe corresponding button in the multimediasystem to end the voice call

When a call is initiated, the audio system ismuted.The mobile phone is no longer connected to themultimedia system.However, if you want to use your mobile phone,do so only when the vehicle is stationary and ina safe location.

Downloading destinations

Downloading destinationsDownloading destinations gives you access to adatabase with over 15 million points of interest(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-gation system in your vehicle. If you know thedestination, the address can be downloaded.Alternatively, you can obtain the location of

Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinationsin the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes with upto four way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidance tothe address entered.X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1the controller and confirm with7.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.If you select No the address can be stored inthe address book.

The destination download function is availableif:Rthe vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys-tem.Rthe relevant mobile phone network is availa-ble and data transfer is possible.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of thembrace PLUS Packageand cannot be purchased separately.You can use the Route Assistance function evenif the vehicle is not equipped with a navigationsystem.Within the framework of this service, you receivea professional and reliable form of navigationsupport without having to leave your vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle's cur-rent position and the desired destination. Youwill then be guided live through the current routesection.

Search & Send

General notesTo use "Search & Send", your vehicle must beequipped with mbrace and a navigation system.Additionally, an mbrace service subscriptionmust be completed."Search & Send" is a destination entry service. Adestination address which is found on GoogleMaps® can be transferred via mbrace directly toyour vehicle's navigation system.

218 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://maps.google.comand enter a destination address into the entryfield.

X To send the destination address to the e-mail address of your mbrace account:click on the corresponding button on theweb-site.Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address willbe sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:Enter the e-mail address you specified whensetting up your mbrace account into the cor-responding field.

X Click "Send".Information on specific commands such as"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on thewebsite.

Calling up a transmitted destinationaddressX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 104).The transmitted destination address is loadedinto the vehicle's navigation system.A display message appears, asking whethernavigation should be started.

X SelectYes by turning3 or sliding1the controller and confirm with7.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.If you select No the address can be stored inthe address book.If you have sent more than one destinationaddress, each individual destination must beconfirmed separately.

Destination addresses are loaded in the sameorder as the order in which they were sent.If you ownmultipleMercedes-Benz vehicleswithmbrace and activated mbrace accounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination will besent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle and areplacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote unlockingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days, the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa-ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail-able and a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed uponwith the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-tionRtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,Android™)

To do this, you will need your identification num-ber and password.

Vehicle remote closingThe vehicle remote-closing feature can be usedwhen you have forgotten to lock the vehicle andyou are no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately remotely lockedwithin four days of the ignition being turned off.After this time, remote closing may be delayedby 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehiclecan no longer be valet locked remotely.The vehicle remote closing feature is available ifthe relevant mobile phone network is availableand a data connection is possible.X Contact the following service hotlines:

Features 219

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centerat 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007You will be asked for your password.

The next time you are inside the vehicle and youswitch on the ignition, the Doors LockedRemotelymessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-tionRtelephone applications (e.g. for iPhone®,Android™)

To do this, you will need your identification num-ber and password.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centertogether with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Centercontacts you and the local law enforcementagency if the vehicle is located.However, only the law enforcement agency isinformed of the location of the vehicle.

If the anti-theft alarm system is activated forlonger than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center is automaticallynotified.

Vehicle Health CheckWith the Vehicle Health Check, the CustomerAssistance Center can provide improved sup-port for problems with your vehicle. During anexisting call, vehicle data is transferred to theCustomer Assistance Center.The customer service representative can usethe received data to decide what kind of assis-tance is required. You are then, for example,guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz ServiceCenter or a recovery vehicle is called.If vehicle data need to be transferred during anInfo call or a Roadside Assistance call, this isinitiated by the Customer Assistance Center.

You will see the Roadside Assistance Con‐nected message in the display. If the VehicleHealth Check can be started, the Request forVehicle Diagnostics Received Startvehicle diagnostics? message appears inthe display.X Press the Yes button to confirm themessage.X When the Vehicle Diagnostics PleaseStart Ignition message appears: turn theSmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock(Y page 104).

X If the Please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehi‐cle to a safe position. messageappears: please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehicle to asafe position.The message in the display disappears.The vehicle operating state check begins. Youwill see the Vehicle Diagnostics Activemessage.If you select Cancel, the Vehicle HealthCheck is canceled completely.

When the check is complete, the Sendingvehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐nection may be interrupted duringdata transfer)message appears. The vehicledata can now be sent.X Press the OK button to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance Center is terminated.You will see the Vehicle diagnosis:Transferring data... message.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance Center.

Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-tion is re-established after the transfer is com-plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at alater time by another means, e.g. by e-mail orphone.Another function of the Vehicle Health Check isthe transfer of service data to the CustomerAssistanceCenter. If a service is due, the displayshows a message to this effect together withinformation about any special offers at yourworkshop.This information can also be called up under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 28).

220 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 25).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transfer andsave predefined routes in the navigation sys-tem.A route can be prepared and sent by either acustomer service representative or under "Own-ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Each route can include up to four way points.Once a route has been received by the naviga-tion system, you will see the Do you want tostart route guidance? DestinationReceived destination has been savedin "Previous destinations". message onthe multimedia system display.The route is saved.X To start route guidance: select Yes.An overview of the route is shown in the dis-play.If you select No, the saved route can be calledup later in the navigation menu.

X Select Start.Route guidance starts.

Downloaded and saved routes can be called upagain.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle,a message will be sent to the Customer Assis-tance Center. The Customer Assistance Centerthen forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receive thisinformation beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit was excee-dedRthe time at which the speed limit was excee-dedRthe selected speed limit which was exceeded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areaswhich thevehicle should not enter or leave. You will beinformed if the vehicle crosses the boundariesof the selected areas. You can select the way inwhich you receive this information beforehand.Possible options include textmessage, e-mail oran automated call.The area can be determined as either a circle ora polygon with a maximum of ten corners. Youcan specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-ferent settings are possible for each area.These settings can be called up under "OwnersOnline" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an Info call andnotify the customer service representative thatyou wish to activate geo-fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated by textmessage.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehicle'spanic alarm via text message. An alarm soundsand the exterior lighting flashes. Depending onthe setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec-onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.

Brush guard (USA only)If the brush guard has to be removed, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

Garage door opener

General notesYou can use the HomeLink® garage door openerintegrated into the rear-view mirror to operateup to three different gate/garage door openersystems.Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integrated garagedoor opener, contact a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCenter.

Features 221

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Alternatively, you can call the following tele-phone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free ofcharge)

More information on HomeLink® and/or com-patible products is also available online athttp://www.homelink.com.Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 127).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that may causeundesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-ence, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that may causeundesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.


G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.

When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.


Programming

ProgrammingPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 222).

Garage door remote controlA is not includedwith the integrated garage door opener.X Delete the memory of the integrated remotecontrol (Y page 224) before programming itfor the first time.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2(Y page 104) in the ignition lock.

X Select one of buttons; to? to use to con-trol the garage door drive.

X To start programming mode: press andhold one of buttons; to? on the integratedgarage door opener.The garage door opener is now in program-ming mode. After a short time, indicatorlamp: will start flashing. It flashes approx-imately once per second.Indicator lamp: flashes immediately thefirst time that the transmitter button is pro-grammed. If this transmitter button hasalready been programmed, indicator lamp:

222 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

will only start flashing at a rate of once a sec-ond after 20 seconds have elapsed.

X Continue to hold the transmitter button.X To program the remote control: pointtransmitter buttonB of remote controlAtowards the transmitter buttons on the rear-view mirror at a distance of 2 to 12 in (5 to30 cm).

X Keep transmitter buttonB on remote controlA pressed until indicator lamp: starts toflash rapidly.When indicator lamp: flashes rapidly: pro-gramming is finished.

X Release transmitter buttons;,= or? onthe integrated remote control and transmitterbuttonB on remote controlA.If indicator lamp: does not flash rapidly andgoes out after approximately 20 seconds:repeat the programming process for the cor-responding button on the rear-view mirror.When doing so, vary the distance betweenremote controlA and the rear-view mirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.Several attempts might be necessary. Youshould test every position for at least20 seconds before trying another position.

If the garage door system works with a rollingcode, you must synchronize the remote controlintegrated in the rear-view mirror with thegarage door system receiver after program-ming.You can find further information on this in theoperating instructions of the garage door sys-tem.

Synchronizing the rolling codePay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 222).If the garage door system uses a rolling code,you will also have to synchronize the garagedoor system with the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-viewmirror. To do this youwillneed to use the programming button on the doordrive control panel. The programming buttonmay be located in different places depending onthe manufacturer. It is usually located on thedoor drive unit on the garage ceiling.Familiarize yourself with the garage door driveoperating instructions, e.g. under "Program-ming additional remote controls", before carry-ing out the following steps.

Your vehicle must be within reach of the garagedoor or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects arepresent within the sweep of the door or gate.Observe the safety notes when performing therolling code synchronization (Y page 222).X Turn the SmartKey to position2(Y page 104) in the ignition lock.

X Get out of the vehicle.X Press the programming button on the doordrive unit.You now have 30 seconds to initiate the nextstep.

X Get into the vehicle.X Press previously programmed button;,=or? on the integrated garage door openerrepeatedly until the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is then com-plete.

Notes on programming the remote con-trolCanadian radio frequency laws require a "break"(or interruption) of the transmission signalsafter broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,these signals may not last long enough for theintegrated remote control to recognize the sig-nal during programming. Comparable withCanadian law, American garage door openersalso have a built-in "interruption".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in Canada.Rif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of where youlive) when using the programming steps.

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? on theintegrated garage door opener until the inte-grated remote control is successfully set up.

X Simultaneously press transmitter buttonBon remote controlA and hold for two sec-onds. Then let go for 2 seconds, press againand hold for 2 seconds.

X Repeat this sequence on transmitter buttonB on remote controlA until the frequencysignal is established.

X If the setup procedure is successful, indicatorlamp: flashes once slowly and goes outafter a few seconds.If indicator lamp: does not flash slowly andthen go out: repeat the programming processfor the corresponding button on the rear-view

Features 223

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

mirror. When doing so, vary the distancebetween remote controlA and the rear-viewmirror.The required distance between remote con-trolA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system.Several attempts might be necessary. Youshould test every position for at least20 seconds before trying another position.

The required distance between remote controlA and the integrated garage door openerdepends on the garage door drive system. Sev-eral attempts might be necessary. You shouldtest every position for at least 25 secondsbefore trying another position.

Problems when programmingIf you have problems when programming theintegrated remote control, please note the fol-lowing:RCheck the transmitter frequency used bygarage door drive remote controlA andwhether it is supported. The transmitter fre-quency can usually be found on the back ofremote controlA for the garage door drive.The integrated remote control is compatiblewith devices that have units which operate inthe frequency range of 280 to 390 MHz.RReplace the batteries in remote controlA.This increases the probability of remote con-trolA sending a strong and precise signal tothe integrated remote control on the rear-view mirror.RWhen programming, hold remote controlAat varying distances and angles from thetransmitter button that you are programming.Try various angles at a distance between2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote controlA is available forthe same garage door drive, repeat the sameprogramming steps with this remote controlA. Before performing these steps,make surethat new batteries have been installed ingarage door drive remote controlA.RNote that some remote controls only transmitfor a limited amount of time (the indicatorlamp on the remote control goes out). PressbuttonB on remote controlA again beforetransmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal trans-mission.

Opening/closing the garage doorOnce programmed, the integrated remote con-trol will assume the function of the garage doorsystem's remote control. Please also read theoperating instructions for the garage door sys-tem.X Turn the SmartKey to position in the ignitionlock2 (Y page 104).

X Press one of buttons; to? on the integra-ted remote control in the rear-viewmirror thatis programmed to operate the garage door.Garage door systemwith fixed code: indicatorlamp: lights up continuously.Garage door system with rolling code: indica-tor lamp: flashes briefly and then lights upfor approximately two seconds. This is repea-ted for up to 20 seconds.The transmitter will transmit a signal for aslong as the transmitter button is beingpressed. The transmission will be halted aftera maximum of 20 seconds and indicatorlamp: will flash. Press the transmitter but-ton again if necessary.

X Press button;,= or? again if necessary.

Clearing the memoryMake sure that you clear the memory of theintegrated garage door opener before selling thevehicle.X Turn the SmartKey to position2(Y page 104) in the ignition lock.

X Press and hold transmitter buttons; and?for approximately 20 seconds until indicatorlamp: flashes rapidly.The memory of the integrated garage dooropener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.

224 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Engine compartment

Hood


G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving. Beforeevery trip, ensure that the hood is locked.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.


G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or fuel injection system when the ignitionis switched on.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or start

again suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

Do not touch the following when the ignition isswitched on:RIgnition coilsRSpark plug connectorsRTest socket

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshield wip-ers or the hood.

Engine compartment 225

Maintenance

andcare

Z

The release lever on the hood is in the footwellon the left-hand side of the vehicle when viewedin the direction of travel.X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Lift the hood slightly.X Push the handle of hood catch; in the direc-tion of the arrow and lift the hood.The hood is opened and held open automati-cally by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a height ofapproximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and close itwith a little more force.

RadiatorDo not cover up the radiator, such as with athermal mat or insect protection cover. Other-wise, the values of the European on-board diag-

nostics may be affected. Some of these read-ings are required by law andmust be accurate atall times.

Engine oil



G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.

226 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare


Notes on the oil levelDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption maybe higher than this when the vehicle is new or ifyou frequently drive at high engine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstickmay bein a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surfaceRthe engine should be switched off for approx-imately five minutes if the engine is at normaloperating temperatureRif the engine is not at normal operating tem-perature, e.g. if the engine was only startedbriefly, wait approximately 30 minutes beforecarrying out the measurement

Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick

Example: engine compartmentOn the G 63 AMG, the oil level can be checkedusing the oil dipstick.

X Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guide tubeto the stop and take it out again after approx-imately three seconds.If the level is between MIN mark= and MAXmark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= orbelow, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine oil.

On all other models, the on-board computermust be used to check the engine oil level.

Checking the oil level using the on-board computerG 550: the oil level can only be checked usingthe on-board computer.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2in the ignition lock.

X Press9 or: on the steering wheel toselect the following message: MeasuringEngine Oil Level Accurate Only WhenVehicle Is Level

The measurement takes a few seconds. You willsee one of the following messages in the multi-function display:REngine Oil Level OKRAdd 1.1 liters Eng. Oil at Next Refu‐elingX Add oil if necessary.If the engine is at normal operating temperatureand the Reduce Engine Oil Level displayappears, too much oil has been added.X Have excess oil siphoned off.If the For Engine Oil Level IgnitionMust Be On message appears:X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 104).

If the Need More Time to Check EngineOil Level message appears:X If the engine is at normal operating tem-perature: repeat the measurement afterapproximately five minutes.

X If the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature: e.g. if the engine was only star-ted briefly, repeat the measurement afterapproximately 30 minutes.


Maintenance

andcare

Z

If the Engine Oil Level Not Measurablewith Running Engine message appears:X Switch off the engine.X If the engine is at normal operating tem-perature: wait about five minutes before car-rying out the measurement.

X If the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature: e.g. if the engine was only star-ted briefly, wait approximately 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

If you wish to cancel the measurement, pressthe9 or: button on the multifunctionsteering wheel.

Adding engine oil! Use only engine oils and oil filters that areapproved for vehicleswith a service system. Alist of the engine oils and oil filters that havebeen tested and approved in accordance withMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts is available at any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.The following cause engine failure or damageto the exhaust system:RUse of engine oils and oil filters that havenot been expressly approved for the servicesystemRReplacement of engine oil and oil filter afterthe replacement interval specified by theservice system has expiredRUse of engine oil additives

! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level isabove the "max" mark on the dipstick, toomuch oil has been added. This can lead todamage to the engine or the catalytic con-verter. Have excess oil siphoned off.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.

Example: engine oil capX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and remove it.X Add the amount of engine oil required.Observe the specifications in the on-board com-puter when doing so or fill carefully to the max-imum mark on the oil dipstick.The difference between the minimum mark andthe maximummark on the oil dipstick is approx-imately 2.1 US qt (2.0 l).X Replace cap: on the filler neck and tightenclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.

Further information on engine oil (Y page 278).

Additional service products



G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.

228 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts

G WARNINGThe cooling system is pressurized, particularlywhen the motor is warm. If you open the cap,you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before you open thecap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowlyopen the cap to relieve pressure.


Checking coolant level

Checking the coolant level (example)X Park the vehicle on a level surface.

Only check the coolant level when the vehicleis on a level surface and the engine has cooleddown.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 104).

X Check the coolant temperature display in theinstrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clock-wise and allow excess pressure to escape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) abovemarker bar= in the filler neckwhen warm, there is enough coolant in cool-ant expansion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as far asit will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 279).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system/headlamp cleaningsystem

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.


Maintenance

andcare

Z

Example: adding liquid to the windshieldwasher system

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab andopen.

X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

The washer fluid reservoir is used for both thewindshield washer system and the headlampcleaning system.If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-mendedminimumof 3.7USqt (3.5 l), amessageappears in the multifunction display promptingyou to add washer fluid (Y page 187).Further information on washer fluid(Y page 280).

Brake fluid level! If you notice that the brake fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir has fallen to the MINmark or less, check the brake system imme-diately for leaks. Also check the thickness ofthe brake linings. Visit a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.Do not add brake fluid. This does not correctthe error.

Only check the brake fluid level when the vehicleis stationary and on a level surface. The brakefluid level is correct if the level is between MAXmark: and MIN mark; on the brake fluidreservoir.

Maintenance

Service interval display

Service messagesYou can obtain up-to-date information concern-ing the servicing of your vehicle from a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).The ASSYST service interval display informs youof the next service due date.If a service due date has been exceeded, youalso hear a warning tone.The multifunction display shows a service mes-sage for several seconds, e.g.:Service A In 999,999 kmService A in .. DaysService A DueService A Exceeded 999,999 kmService A Exceeded .. DaysMaintaining the time-dependent service sched-ule:X Before disconnecting the battery, note downthe service due date displayed.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtract thebattery disconnection periods from the ser-vice date shown on the display.

The service interval display should not be con-fused with the4 engine oil level display.The symbol and the letter indicate which type ofservice is due:¯ Minor service A± Major service BThe ASSYST service interval display does nottake into account any periods of time duringwhich the battery is disconnected.

230 MaintenanceMaintenance

andcare

Hiding a service messageX To hide the service message, press the%back button on the multifunction steeringwheel (Y page 158).

Displaying service messagesUse the buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.X Switch on the ignition.X Press= or; to select the standarddisplay menu on the steering wheel(Y page 160).

X Press9 or: to select the serviceinterval display.The¯ or± service symbol and the ser-vice due date are displayed.

Points to rememberThe specified maintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditions orincreased load on the vehicle, maintenancework must be carried out more frequently, forexample:Rregular city drivingwith frequent intermediatestopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travel shortdistancesRuse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long periodsUnder these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires must becheckedmore often. Further information can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

General notes! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any ofthe following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agents

RsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protective filmswith hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.You could otherwise scratch or damage thesurfaces and protective film.

! Do not park your vehicle for a long period oftime directly after cleaning, particularly aftercleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Byheating up the brakes, the brake discs andpads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for along period of time.

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-ically in certain situations.To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use special

Care 231

Maintenance

andcare

Z

cleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that the automatic car wash issuitable for the size of the vehicle. Fold in theexterior mirrors before the vehicle is washed.The exterior mirrors could otherwise be dam-aged.

! Make sure that the automatic transmissionis in position N when washing your vehicle ina tow-through car wash. The vehicle could bedamaged if the transmission is in anotherposition.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroofare fully closed.Rthe blower is switched off.Rthewindshield wiper switch is at position0.The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe off waxfrom the windshield and the wiper blades. Thiswill prevent smears and reduce wiping noisescaused by residue on the windshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in each country.When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.When washing the underside of the vehicle, alsoclean the insides of the wheels.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-tle jet of water.

X Do not point thewater jet directly towards theair inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out the spongefrequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-work.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information about thecorrect distance is available from the equip-ment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle around whencleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RTiresRDoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.RElectrical componentsRBatteryRConnectorsRLampsRSealsRTrimRVentilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical components canlead to leaks or failures.

! Vehicles with decorative film: parts of yourvehicle are covered with a decorative film.Maintain a distance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm)between the parts of the vehicle covered withthe film and the nozzle of the high pressurecleaner.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle around whencleaning your vehicle.

232 CareMaintenance

andcare

Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected bycorrosion and damage caused by inadequatecare cannot always be completely repaired. Insuch cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect remover andrinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse offthe treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,fuels and greases by rubbing gently with acloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighterfluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recommen-ded and approved byMercedes-Benz. This is thecase approximately every three to five months,depending on the climate conditions and thecare product used.The cleaning product Paint Cleaner, which hasbeen recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz, should be used when dirt haspenetrated the paint surface.Also use Paint Cleaner on paint that has becomedull.Do not use these care products in the sun or onthe hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-work quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:Rstrong rubbing of the paintwork withunsuitable materialsRfrequent use of automatic car washesRwashing the vehicle in direct sunlight

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishingproducts, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. Theseproducts are only suitable for high-gloss sur-faces. Their use on vehicles with matte finishleads to considerable surface damage (shiny,spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clearmatte finish. This will help you to avoid damageto the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheels witha clear matte finish.The vehicle should ideally be washed by handusing a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty ofwater.Use only insect remover and car shampoo fromthe range of approved Mercedes-Benz careproducts.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.

! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

Care 233

Maintenance

andcare

Z

! Do not park your vehicle for a long period oftime directly after cleaning, particularly aftercleaning the wheel rim with wheel cleaner.Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,drive for a few minutes after cleaning. Byheating up the brakes, the brake discs andpads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for along period of time.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of the windows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. Thereis otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals andpollen may under certain circumstances pre-vent water from draining away. This can leadto corrosion damage and damage to elec-tronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of the windowswith a damp cloth and a cleaning product thatis recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, thewiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often and donot rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-ite coating could be damaged. This couldcause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged if thewiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from thewindshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a dampcloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothswhich are suitable for plastic light lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning clothscould scratch or damage the plastic light len-ses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light-ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaningagent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo orcleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning clothsthat are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitablecleaning agents or cleaning cloths couldscratch or damage the plastic lenses of themirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wetsponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a distanceof at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicleand the power washer nozzle. Informationabout the correct distance is available fromthe equipment manufacturer.

234 CareMaintenance

andcare

X Clean sensors: of the driving systems withwater, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean cam-era lens:.

Cleaning chrome partsImpurities combined with the effects of road gritand corrosive environmental factors may causeflash rust to form on the surface. You canrestore the original shine of chrome parts bycleaning them regularly, especially in winter andafter washing.X Clean chrome parts with a chrome care prod-uct tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the exhaust pipe

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.

! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents, such as bathroomcleaner or wheel cleaner.

Impurities combined with the effects of road gritand corrosive environmental factors may causeflash rust to form on the surface. You canrestore the original shine of the exhaust pipe bycleaning it regularly, especially in winter andafter washing.X Clean the exhaust pipe with a care producttested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the trailer tow hitch! Do not clean the ball coupling with a powerwasher. Do not use solvents.

! Please note the care instructions in thetrailer coupling manufacturer's operatinginstructions.

H Environmental noteDispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

The ball coupling must be cleaned if it becomesdirty or corroded.X Remove rust, e.g. with a wire brush.X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ballcoupling.

X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch isworking properly.

You can also have the maintenance work on theball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried outby a qualified specialist workshop.

Care 235

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Interior care

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household cleaningagents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surface whencleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-age to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure that itis switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCDdisplay cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibercloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Never attach the following to plastic surfa-ces:RstickersRfilmsRperfume oil container or similarYou could otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent orsunscreen to come into contact with the plas-tic trim. Thismaintains the high-quality look ofthe surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and selec-tor leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-ments! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishesor waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-ing the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish for trim strips. Thetrim strips have a chrome look but are mostlymade of anodized aluminum and can losetheir shine if chrome polish is used. Use adamp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaningthe trim strips.If the chrome-plated trim strips are very dirty,you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsureas to whether the trim strips are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with adamp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Trim elements with piano black finish:wipewith a soft, damp cotton cloth. Use cleanwater.

X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Donot use amicrofiber cloth to clean coversmade out of real leather, artificial leather orDINAMICA. If used often, these can damagethe cover.

! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and always wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leavethe seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results

236 CareMaintenance

andcare

depend on the type of dirt and how long ithas been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines.

Note that regular care is essential to ensure thatthe appearance and comfort of the covers isretained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefully witha damp cloth and then wipe the coversdown with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwise becomerough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:Rdifferences in the textureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and always wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leavethe seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning resultsdepend on the type of dirt and how long ithas been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts byheating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80†)or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarmwater and soap solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush ordry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaningagents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Care 237

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Where will I find...?

Warning triangle

Removing the warning triangle

The warning triangle is secured under the rearbench seat.X Release tabs;.X Remove warning triangle:.

Setting up the warning triangle

X Fold feet= down and out to the side.X Pull side reflectors; up to form a triangleand lock them at the top using press-stud:.

First-aid kit

The first-aid kit is located in the stowage com-partment of the right-hand door.X Remove first-aid kit: from the stowagecompartment.

Check the expiration date on the first-aid kit atleast once a year. Replace the contents if nec-essary, and replace missing items.

Vehicle tool kit

General notesi When they leave the factory, vehicles arenot equipped with the tools needed to changea wheel, such as a jack or lug wrench. Sometools for changing a wheel are specific to thevehicle. To obtain tools approved for yourvehicle, contact a qualified specialist work-shop.

The vehicle tool kit contains:Rvehicle tool kit bag with:

- fuse extractor- a pump lever for the vehicle jack- a screwdriver- a lug wrenchRjack

238 Where will I find...?Breakdow

nassistance

Vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit is under the cover in thefootwell in front of the rear bench seat.X Fold cover: to the side.X Pull vehicle tool kit; out by the tab.

Jack! Make sure that, while installing the vehiclejack, there are no cables on the holder, inorder to avoid them becoming trapped.

The jack is located under the rear bench seat onthe right-hand side when viewed in the directionof travel.X Fold rear bench seat forward (Y page 208).X Open cover:.X Pull bar= up and detach from tab?.X Remove jack;.

Exterior spare wheel bracket

General notes

G WARNINGThe wheel or tire size as well as the tire type ofthe spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel mayseverely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly anddrive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheel oremergency spare wheel that differs in size.Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size briefly.Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.

i When changing a wheel, you should alsoobserve the safety notes in the "Flat tire" sec-tion (Y page 240).

The spare wheel is on the outer side of the reardoor.

Stainless-steel spare hub cap

Where will I find...? 239

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X Take the screwdriver out of the vehicle tool kit(Y page 239).

X Open the lock on cover ring: with screw-driver= or a similar tool.

X Fold tab; down.

X Pull cover ring: apart and remove it.X Pull off trim panel?.

X When re-installing cover panel?, make surethat retainerA engages into recessB.

Removing the spare wheel

The sparewheel is heavy. Take particular note ofthis when removing the spare wheel.X Remove wheel nuts:.X Remove the spare wheel.

Mounting the wheelAfter changing a wheel:X Repair or replace the damaged wheel as soonas possible and secure the spare wheel inplace again.

X Secure the damaged wheel on the sparewheel bracket with wheel nuts:. Whendoing so, make sure that the wheel cannotcome loose.

X When re-installing trim panel?, make surethat retainerB engages in recessA(Y page 239).

X Make sure that tab; is below when re-installing cover ring: (Y page 239).

X For safety reasons, regularly check to ensurethat the wheel is securely fastened.

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 120).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.The steering wheel lock stays active for aslong as the SmartKey is removed.

X Make sure that the passengers are not endan-gered as they do so. Make sure that no one isnear the danger area while a wheel is beingchanged. Anyone who is not directly assistingin the wheel change should, for example,stand behind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to trafficconditions when doing so.

240 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

X Close the driver's door.X Place the warning triangle a suitable distanceaway (Y page 238). Observe legal require-ments.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge are requiredwhen working on the battery, e.g. removal andinstallation. You should therefore have all workinvolving the battery carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or theESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.You could lose control of the vehicle, forexample:Rwhen brakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuversand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. Youshould have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

For further information about ABS and ESP®,see (Y page 57) and (Y page 59).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gas mixture forms whencharging the battery as well as when jump-start-ing.Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up ofelectrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-ple:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across the car-pet or other synthetic materialsRif you rub the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

Battery (vehicle) 241

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the Mainte-nanceBooklet or contact a qualified specialistworkshop for more information.

! Always havework on batteries carried out ata qualified specialist workshop. Should it, inexceptional circumstances, be absolutelynecessary to disconnect the 12-volt batteryyourself, observe the following:RSecure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.RSwitch off the ignition.RDisconnect the negative terminal first andthen the positive terminal.

The transmission is locked in positionjafter disconnecting the battery.After the work has been done, install the bat-tery and replace the cover of the positive ter-minal clamp firmly.

Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic.Avoid contact with skin, eyes orclothing.

Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehicleoccupants from suffering acid burns should thebattery be damaged in the event of an accident.In order for the battery to achieve the maximumpossible service life, it must always be suffi-ciently charged.Like other batteries, the vehicle battery maydischarge over time if you do not use the vehicle.In this case, have the battery disconnected at aqualified specialist workshop. You can alsocharge the batterywith a charger recommendedby Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special-ist workshop for further information.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainly forshort trips or if you leave it standing idle for alengthy period. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop if you wish to leave your vehicleparked for a long period of time.Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicleand do not require any electrical consumers.The vehicle will then use very little energy, thusconserving battery power.

i If the power supply has been interrupted,e.g. due to a discharged battery, you will haveto:Rreset the head restraints on the front seats(Y page 76)Rreset the function for automatically foldingthe exterior mirrors in/out by folding themirrors out once (Y page 82)

242 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Charging the battery! Only use battery chargers with a maximumcharging voltage of 14.8 V.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 243).X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the same orderas when connecting the donor battery in thejump-starting procedure (Y page 243).

Keep away from fire and open flames. Do notlean over a battery. Never charge the battery if itis still installed in the vehicle, unless you use abattery charger which has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. A battery chargerunit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits thecharging of the battery in its installed position.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor further information and availability. Read thebattery charger's operating instructions beforecharging the battery.If thewarning and indicator lamps do not light upon the instrument cluster when temperaturesare low, it is probably because the dischargedbattery has frozen. In this case you may neitherjump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.The service life of a thawed-out battery may beshorter. The starting characteristics can beimpaired, particularly at low temperatures. Havethe thawed-out battery checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty ofclean water and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.

Jump-starting 243

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

If the warning and indicator lamps do not light up on the instrument cluster when temperatures arelow, it is probably because the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither chargethe battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. Thestarting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-outbattery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, theengine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.RJump-starting may be performed only using batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected fora few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clampdo not come into contact with other metal sections.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine isrunning, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

244 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

X Apply the parking brake.X Shift the automatic transmission to position P.X Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must beoff.

X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-startingdevice.The jump-starting connection point consists of contacts; and=.X Lift up cover: of positive terminal; in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal? of donor batteryB using thejumper cable. Always begin with positive terminal; on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminalA of donor batteryB to ground point= of your vehicle using thejumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor batteryB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point= and negative terminalA, then from pos-itive clamp; and positive terminal?. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.

X Close cover: of positive terminal; after removing the jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Jump-starting 245

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Towing and tow-starting


G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.

G WARNINGYou can no longer steer the vehicle if thesteering wheel lock has been engaged. Thereis a risk of an accident.Always switch off the ignitionwhen towing thevehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.

Details on the permissible gross vehicle weightof your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden-tification plate (Y page 275).

! When DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD func-tion is activated, the vehicle brakes automat-ically in certain situations.

To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30miles (50km). The towing speed of 30mph(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

! Only secure the tow cable or tow bar to thetowing eyes. You could otherwise damage thevehicle.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Thiscould damage the vehicle.

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery. Thiscould damage the vehicle. If in doubt, havethe vehicle recovered using a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high, thevehicles could be damaged.

! Your vehicles is equipped with an automatictransmission. Therefore, you must not havethe vehicle tow-started. The transmissionmay otherwise be damaged.

It is better to have the vehicle transported thanto have it towed away.If the transfer case can be shifted into the Neu-tral position, you can tow away the vehicle.If the transfer case cannot be shifted into theNeutral position, you can tow away the vehiclewith one axle raised. Please bear the following inmind:Rremove the propeller shaft between the trans-fer case and the rolling axle.Rturn the SmartKey to position1 in the igni-tion lock.

The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position2 inthe ignition lockRcannot shift the automatic transmission topositioni

Disarm the automatic locking feature before thevehicle is towed (Y page 67). You could other-wise be locked out when pushing or towing thevehicle.

246 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Towing eyes

Towing eyes, front

: Towing eyes, front

Towing eye, rear

Rear towing eye: is located under the bumper,on the left-hand side when viewed in the direc-tion of travel.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundIt is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 246).The automatic transmission automatically shiftsto positionPwhen you open the driver's or front-passenger door or when you remove the Smart-Key from the ignition lock. In order to ensurethat the automatic transmission stays in posi-tion N when towing the vehicle, you mustobserve the following points:X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni-tion lock.

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift the transfer case to position Neutral(Y page 147).

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.

X Leave the SmartKey in position2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 87).

In order to signal a change of direction whentowing the vehicle with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combination switchas usual. In this case, only the indicator lampsfor the direction of travel flash. After resettingthe combination switch, the hazard warninglamp starts flashing again.

i The automatic transmission can onlychange gear when the battery has sufficientcharge.If you cannot shift the automatic transmissionto position N, the propeller shafts to thedriven axles must be removed.

Transporting the vehicle

! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, thefront and rear axlesmust be stationary and onthe same transportation vehicle. Positioningover the connection point of the transportvehicle is not permitted. The drive train mayotherwise be damaged.

! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise, thevehicle could be damaged.

Towing and tow-starting 247

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

The towing eyes can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter if you wish to trans-port it.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the igni-tion lock.

X Shift the transfer case to position Neutral(Y page 147).


As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Apply the parking brake.X Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.

X Turn the SmartKey to positionu in the igni-tion lock and remove it.

X Secure the vehicle.

Recovering a vehicle that has becomestuck! When recovering a vehicle that has becomestuck, pull it as smoothly and evenly as pos-sible. Excessive tractive power could damagethe vehicles.

If the drive wheels have become stuck in looseor muddy ground, pull the vehicle out withextreme caution, especially so if the vehicle isloaded.Never attempt to recover a stuck vehicle with atrailer attached.Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible usingthe tracks it made when it became stuck.

Towing in the event of malfunctions

General notes! If you are removing the propeller shaft, useM10 nuts as spacers on the M8 bolts andsecure them with M8 nuts.New self-locking nuts must be used when thepropeller shafts are refitted.

It is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 246).

i Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter.

In the event of damage to the engine,transmission or electrical systemX Shift the transfer case to neutral(Y page 147).


In the event of damage to the transfercaseHave the propeller shafts between the axles andthe transfer case removed.

In the event of damage to the front axleHave the propeller shaft between the rear axleand the transfer case removed.Then have the vehicle towed away with the frontaxle raised.

In the event of damage to the rear axleHave the propeller shaft between the front axleand the transfer case removed.Then have the vehicle towed with the rear axleraised and wheel rollers under the front axle.

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmission mustnot be tow-started. You could otherwise dam-age the automatic transmission.

You can find information on "Jump-starting"under (Y page 243).

Fuses


G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

248 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of thesame rating, which you can recognize by thecolor and value. The fuse ratings are listed in thefuse allocation chart (Y page 249).If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified special-ist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

! Only use fuses that have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and which have thecorrect fuse rating for the system concerned.Otherwise, components or systems could bedamaged.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that it islying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep-ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.

Before changing a fusePay attention to the important safety notes(Y page 248).X Switch off the engine.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 120).

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RMain fuse box on the driver's side of the dash-boardRFuse box in the front-passenger footwellRFuse box in the transmission tunnelRFuse box in the cargo compartmentThe fuse allocation chart and the spare fuses arein the fuse box on the dashboard on the front-passenger side (Y page 249).The fuse extractor is in the vehicle tool kit(Y page 120).

Dashboard fuse box! Do not use a pointed object such as a screw-driver to open the cover in the dashboard. Youcould damage the dashboard or the cover.

X Open the front-passenger door.X To open: pull cover: out in the direction ofthe arrow and remove it.

X To close: clip in cover: on the front of thedashboard.

X Fold cover: in until it engages.

Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-well

X Unscrew screws:.X Lift up cover; in the direction of the arrow.

Fuses 249

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

= Fuse box

Fuse box in the transmission tunnel

X Fold the cup holder on the center consoledown (Y page 210).

X Move the front-passenger seat as far forwardas possible (Y page 76).

X To open: unscrew screws:.X Remove cover; in the direction of thearrow.

X To close: clip in cover;.X Install cover; with screws:.

Fuse box in the cargo compartment

X Open the rear door.X To open: unscrew screws:.X Lift up cover; in the direction of the arrowand remove it.

250 FusesBreakdow

nassistance


G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WarningA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.do not drive with a flat tire. Immediatelyreplace the flat tire with your spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-rectly can impair the operating safety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and ask about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsFurther information regarding wheels and tirescan be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"(Y page 273).You can ask for information regarding permittedwheel/tire combinations at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Information on tire pressure can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 260)Rin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 119)Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 254)

Operation

Information on drivingCheck the tire pressure when the vehicle isheavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noisesand unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-ing to one side. This may indicate that thewheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect thata tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible tocheck the wheels and tires for damage. Hiddentire damage could also be causing the unusualhandling characteristics. If you find no signs ofdamage, have the tires and wheels checked at aqualified specialist workshop.When parking your vehicle, make sure that thetires do not get deformed by the curb or otherobstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuseangle. You could otherwise damage the wheelrims and tires.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Checkwheels and tires for damage at least oncea month. Check wheels and tires after drivingoff-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheelscan cause a loss of tire pressure.Pay particular attention to damage such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpunctures in the tiresRtears in the tires

Operation 251

Wheelsandtires

Z

Rbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole width ofthe tire (Y page 252). In order to inspect theinner side of the tire surface, turn the steeringwheel to full lock.All wheels must have a valve cap to protect thevalve against dirt and moisture. Do not installanything onto the valve other than the standardvalve cap or a valve cap approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any other valvecaps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoringsystems.You should regularly check the pressure of allyour tires including the spare wheel, particularlyprior to long trips. Adjust the tire pressure asnecessary (Y page 254).The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Notes on tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Marking: shows where the bar indicator(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tiretread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.They are visible once a tread depth of approx-imatelyá in (1.6mm) has been reached. If thisis the case, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the same typeand make.ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto thewheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for thefirst 60 miles (100 km). The new tires onlyreach their full performance after this dis-tance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reduces thetraction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to thespare wheel.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 269).

252 Winter operationWheelsandtires

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), elasticity insummer tires is significantly lower and thus alsotraction and braking power. Change the tires onyour vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires atvery cold temperatures could cause cracks toform, thereby damaging the tires permanently.Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility forthis type of damage.

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

G WARNINGWheel and tire dimensions as well as the typeof tire can vary between the spare wheel andthe wheel to be replaced. When the sparewheel is mounted, driving characteristics maybe severely affected. There is a risk of an acci-dent.In order to reduce risks:Ryou should therefore adapt your drivingstyle and drive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheelthat differs from the wheel to be replaced.Ronly use a spare wheel that differs from thewheel to be replaced for a short time.Rdo not deactivate ESP®.Rhave a spare wheel that differs from thewheel that has been changed replaced atthe nearest qualified specialist workshop.

You must observe the correct wheel andtire dimensions as well as the wheel type.

Do not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph(80 km/h) if a spare wheel of a different size isinstalled.At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7†), use wintertires or all-season tires. Both types of tire areidentified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S marking providethe best possible grip in wintry road conditions.Only these tires will allow driving safety systemssuch as ABS and ESP® to function optimally inwinter. These tires have been developed specif-ically for driving in snow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread on allwheels to maintain safe handling characteris-tics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted the M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 257).X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 259).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf you drive too fast with snow chains moun-ted, they may snap. As a result, you couldinjure others and damage the vehicle. There isa risk of an accident.Observe the maximum permissible speed foroperation with snow chains.

! Information about the use of snow chaincompatible AMG winter tires is applicable forAMG tires. Use of snow chains is only per-missible with these tires.

! Onsome tire sizes there is not enough spacefor snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehi-cle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire com-binations" section under "Tires and wheels".

Winter operation 253

Wheelsandtires

Z

! Check the snow chains for damage beforemounting them. Damaged or worn snowchains may snap and damage the followingcomponents:RwheelRwheel housingRwheel suspensionFor this reason, you must use only snowchains that are free of defects. Observe themanufacturer's mounting instructions.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains that havebeen specially approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality. For more information,please contact a qualified specialist workshop.If you intend to mount snow chains, please bearthe following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Observe the infor-mation regarding permitted wheel/tire com-binations (Y page 273).RInstall the snow chains on all four wheels formaximum tractive power and driving stability.If you only have two snow chains, install theseas a pair on the rear wheels. The vehicle thenremains more stable under braking.ROnly use snow chains when driving on roadscompletely covered by snow. Remove thesnow chains as soon as possible when youcome to a road that is not snow-covered.RLocal regulationsmay restrict the use of snowchains. Observe the appropriate regulations ifyou wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

You may wish to deactivate ESP® when pullingaway with snow chains installed (Y page 59).You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in acontrolled manner, achieving an increased driv-ing force (cutting action).

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications


G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The data on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard and tire pressure table shown here areexamples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-cle-specific and may deviate from the datashown here. The tire pressure specificationsthat are valid for your vehicle can be found onthe Tire and Loading Information placard andtire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Operation with a trailer: the applicable valuefor the rear axle is the maximum tire pressurevalue stated in the table inside the fuel filler flap.Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

254 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressuresThe Tire and Loading Information placard is onthe B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 260).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires. The recommended tire pressures are validfor the maximum permissible load and up to themaximum permissible vehicle speed.

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuelfiller flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tirespermitted at the factory for this vehicle; seeillustration (example).

The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded tire pressure for cold tires under variousoperating conditions, i.e. differing load andspeed conditions of the vehicle.If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only valid forthat tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in the tablefor different numbers of occupants and amountsof luggage. The actual number of seats may dif-fer.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.The rim diameter is part of the tire size and canbe found on the tire sidewall (Y page 264).If the tire pressures have been set to the lowervalues for lighter loads and/or lower roadspeeds, the pressures should be reset to thehigher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speedsThe tire pressures for increased loads and/orhigher road speeds, shown in the tire pressuretable, may have a negative effect on drivingcomfort.If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this canlead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud-den loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tirepressure. The outer appearance of a tire does

Tire pressure 255

Wheelsandtires

Z

not permit any reliable conclusion about the tirepressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressurecan be checked in the on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is dependenton the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked without directsunlight on the tires for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending on theoutside temperature, the vehicle speed and thetire load. If the tire temperature changes by18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes byapproximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Takethis into account when checking the pressure ofwarm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it istoo low for the current operating conditions. Ifyou check the tire pressure when the tires arewarm, the resulting value will be higher than ifthe tires were cold. This is normal. Do notreduce the tire pressure to the value specifiedfor cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwisebe too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 119)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflated tires

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRadversely affect handlingRwear excessively and/or unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more likely to become damaged

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the recom-mended tire pressure for your vehicle whenadjusting the tire pressure (Y page 268).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.


Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 254).Information on air pressure for the tires on yourvehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillarRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 119)Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 254)

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pressure,proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to bechecked.

X Press the tire pressure gage securely onto thevalve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it to therecommended value on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the tire pressure table(Y page 254).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tirepressure to the recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release air. Todo so, press down the metal pin in the valve,using the tip of a pen for example. Then checkthe tire pressure again using the tire pressurechecker.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tirepressures in all four tires. The tire pressuremon-itor warns you if the pressure drops in one ormore of the tires. The tire pressure monitor onlyfunctions if the corresponding sensors areinstalled in all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed in themultifunction display. The current tire pressureof each wheel is shown in the Serv.menu afterdriving for a few minutes.

Information on the message display can befound in the "Checking the tire pressure elec-tronically" section (Y page 258).


G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressure rec-ommended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressurelabel on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than thesize indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard or the tire pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire pressure forthose tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Underinflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle's handling and stop-ping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-er's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.USA only:

Tire pressure 257

Wheelsandtires

Z

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the warning lamp willflash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists.When themalfunction indicator is illuminated,the systemmay not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-tions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the mounting of incompatiblereplacement or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-tioning properly. Always check the TPMSmal-function telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to function prop-erly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 254). Note that the correct tire pressurefor the current operating situation must first betaught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If a sub-stantial loss of pressure occurs, the warningthreshold for the warning message is aligned tothe taught-in reference values. Restart the tirepressuremonitor after adjusting the pressure ofthe cold tires (Y page 259). The current pres-sures are saved as new reference values. As aresult, a warning message will appear if the tirepressure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn you ofan incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe thenotes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 254).The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn youof a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire ispenetrated by a foreign object. In the event of asudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to ahalt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steeringmovements.The tire pressure monitor has a yellowhwarning lamp on the instrument cluster for indi-

cating a pressure loss or malfunction. The waythat the warning lamp flashes or lights up indi-cates whether a tire pressure is too low orwhether the tire pressure monitor is malfunc-tioning:Rif theh warning lamp is lit continuously,the tire pressure in one or more tires is sig-nificantly too low. The tire pressuremonitor isnot malfunctioning.Rif theh warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

In addition to thehwarning lamp, amessageappears in the multifunction display. Observethe information on display messages(Y page 183).It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunctionof the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. Themalfunction is indicated first by theh tirepressure warning lamp flashing for approx-imately one minute and then remaining lit. If themalfunction has been rectified, theh tirepressure warning lamp goes out after driving fora few minutes.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. Thetire pressures shown by the on-board computerrefer to those measured at sea level. At highaltitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by apressure gauge are higher than those shown bythe on-board computer. In this case, do notreduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressure monitor canbe affected by interference from radio transmit-ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-wayradios) thatmay be being operated in or near thevehicle.

Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the currenttire pressure of each wheel.

If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be


displayed after driving a few minutesmessage appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-itor automatically detects new wheels or newsensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tirepressure value to the individual wheels is notpossible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activedisplay message is shown instead of the tirepressure display. The tire pressures are alreadybeing monitored.If a spare wheel is mounted, the system maycontinue to show the tire pressure of the wheelthat has been removed for a few minutes. If thisoccurs, note that the value displayed for thepositionwhere the sparewheel is installed is notthe same as the current tire pressure of thespare wheel.

Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressure monitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning message isshown in the multifunction display. The yellowh tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.RIf the Correct Tire Pressure messageappears in the multifunction display, the tirepressure in at least one tire is too low. The tirepressuremust be corrected at the next oppor-tunity.RIf the Check Tires message appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure in atleast one tire has dropped significantly. Thetires must be checked.RIf the Caution - Tire Malfunc. messageappears in the multifunction display, the tirepressure in at least one tire has dropped sud-denly. The tires must be checked.

Be sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes in the display messages in the "Tires" sec-tion (Y page 183).If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,the tire pressures may be displayed for thewrong positions for a short time. This is rectifiedafter a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-sures are displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted and theh warning lamp goes out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as the referencevalues for monitoring. In most cases, the tire

pressure monitor will automatically detect thenew reference values after you have changedthe tire pressure. However, you can also set ref-erence values manually as described here. Thetire pressuremonitor thenmonitors the new tirepressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-ded for the corresponding driving situation onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.You can find more tire pressures for variousoperating conditions in the tire pressure tableinside the filler flap.Observe the information on tire pressurewhen doing so (Y page 254).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct onall four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.

X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Serv. menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the currenttire pressure for each tire or the Tire pres‐sure will be displayed after drivinga few minutes message appears.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐erence Valuesmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressures arewithin the specified range. The new tire pres-sures are then accepted as reference valuesand monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure 259

Wheelsandtires

Z

Radio type approval for the tire pres-sure monitor (NEW)

Country Radio type approval number

USA FCC ID: MRXGG4FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4

Canada IC: 2546A-GG4

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show themaximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is

on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tireand Loading Information placard shows themaximum permissible number of occu-pants and themaximumpermissible vehicleload. It also contains details of the tire sizesand corresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-tification plate informs you of the grossvehicle weight rating. It is made up of thevehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, thefuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-mation about the maximum gross axleweight rating on the front and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle). Do not exceedthe maximum gross vehicle weight or themaximum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross mass

X Specification for maximum permissibleload: is listed on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard: "The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, cargo,luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if applica-ble) must not exceed the specified value.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. Themaximum permissible loadis vehicle-specific and may deviate from thedata shown here. The maximum permissibleload that applies for your vehicle can be foundon your vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard.

260 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown.The number of seats in your vehicle can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,

Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-suant to the "National Traffic and Motor VehicleSafety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combinedweight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’sTire and Loading Information placard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-city. Example: if the "XXX" amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas-sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-cle. That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacity cal-culated in step 4.

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varyingseating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a maximumload of 1,500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using theactual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard(Y page 260).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Observe the additional information when towing a trailer (Y page 151).Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximumweight of occupantsand load (data from theTire and Loading Infor-mation placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Loading the vehicle 261

Wheelsandtires

Z

Step 2


Number of people inthe vehicle (driver andoccupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occu-pants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)Occupant 2: 180 lbs(82 kg)Occupant 3: 160 lbs(73 kg)Occupant 4: 140 lbs(63 kg)Occupant 5: 120 lbs(54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs(91 kg)Occupant 2: 190 lbs(86 kg)Occupant 3: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

Step 3


Permissible load (maxi-mum gross vehicleweight rating from theTire and Loading Infor-mation placard minusthe gross weight of alloccupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò750 lbs (340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò540 lbs (245 kg)=960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total load care-fully, you should still make sure that the grossvehicle weight rating and the gross axle weightrating are not exceeded. Details can be found onthe vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 260).Gross vehicle weight rating: the gross weightof the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailerload/noseweight (if applicable) must notexceed the gross vehicle weight rating.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-mumpermissible load that can be carried by oneaxle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed themaximum permissible values (gross vehicle

weight and maximum gross axle weight rating),have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-pants, load and full trailer load if applicable)weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

262 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.government specifications. Their purpose is toprovide drivers with uniform reliable informationon tire performance data. Tire manufacturershave to grade tires using three performance fac-tors:: tread wear grade,; traction grade and= temperature grade. These regulations do notapply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold inNorth America are provided with the corre-sponding quality grading markings on the side-wall of the tire.Quality grades can be found, where applicable,on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum section width.Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tiresmust conform to the stat-utory safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.


TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified U.S.government course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half times as wellon the government course as a tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires depends uponthe actual conditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, service practicesand differences in road characteristics and cli-mate.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage tothe drive train.

The traction grades – from highest to lowest –are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent thetire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-ured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfaces.You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum treaddepth ofã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.Observe the legally required minimum tire treaddepth (Y page 252). Winter tires can reduce thebraking distance on snow-covered surfaces incomparison with summer tires. The braking dis-tance is still much further than on surfaces thatare not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-priate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)(Y page 253).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated andnot overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately or

All about wheels and tires 263

Wheelsandtires

Z

in combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C, representing the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-tained high temperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law.

Tire labeling

Overview of tire labeling

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 267)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 266)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 266)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 256)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 267)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity

and speed rating (Y page 264)D Load index (Y page 266)E Tire name

The markings described above are on the tire inaddition to the tire name (sales designation) andthe manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Height-width ratio in percentage= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed ratingGeneral: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, a letter is imprinted into the tire wallbefore the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: passengervehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturingstandards.If "P" precedes the size description: light trucktires according to U.S. manufacturing stand-ards.

264 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tirepressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width:tire width: shows the nominal tirewidth in millimeters.Height-width ratio: height-width ratio; is theratio between tire height and tire width. Theaspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tirewidth by the tire height. The resulting quotient isgiven as a percentage.Tire code: tire code= shows the tire type. "R"represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonaltires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the sizedescription, depending on the manufacturer(e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diameterof the bead seat, not the diameter of the rimflange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).The load-bearing index: load-bearing indexA(also load index), is a code that contains themaximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 260).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.Further information on the maximum tire load inkilograms and pounds (Y page 266).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 266).Speed rating:speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.


Regardless of the speed rating, always observethe speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt yourdriving style to the traffic conditions.

i Since 2009, tires in Europe which corre-spond to the noise limitations of DirectiveECE-R 117 show an >>S<< (Sound) mark. Thismarking is in accordance with the typeapproval number and is not connected to thespeed rating.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up of load-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifications,ask the tire manufacturer in order to find outthe maximum speed.If a service specification is available, the max-imum speed is limited according to the speedrating in the service specification. Example:245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" isthe service specification. The letter "Y" rep-resents the speed rating and the maximumspeed of the tire is limited to 186 mph(300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR",and the service specifica-tion must be given in parentheses. Example:275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-cates that the maximum speed of the tire isover 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-ufacturer about the maximum speed.


Wheelsandtires

Z

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S1 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S1 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S1 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to the M+Smarking, winter tires alsohave thei snowflake symbol on the tirewall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association ofCanada (RAC) regarding the tire traction onsnow. They have been especially developedfor driving on snow.

When the electronic speed limiter is set, yourvehicle is prevented from exceeding 130 mph(210 km/h).The speed rating of tires mounted at the factorymay be higher than themaximum speed that theelectronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Youcan find information on this under "Tires"(Y page 273).Further information about reading tire data canbe obtained from any qualified specialist work-shop.

Load index

In addition to the load bearing index, loadindex:may be imprinted after the letters that

identify speed indexB on the sidewall of thetire (Y page 264).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above) indicates a standard-load tire(SL).RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range that dependson themaximum load that the tire can carry ata certain pressure


Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load: is the maximum permis-sible weight for which the tire is approved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 260).


DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations stipulate that every tiremanufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN inor on the sidewall of each tire produced.

1 Or M+Si for winter tires.


The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables tire manufacturers to inform pur-chasers of recalls and other safety-relevantmat-ters. It makes it possible for the purchaser toeasily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-tion code;, tire size=, tire type code? andmanufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): Tiresymbol: indicates that the tire complies withthe requirements of the U.S. Department ofTransportation.Manufacturer identification code: manufac-turer identification code; provides details onthe tire manufacturer. New tires have a codewith two symbols. Retreaded tires have a codewith four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 273).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: Tire type code? can be usedby the manufacturer as a code to describe spe-cific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureAprovides information about the age of a tire. Thefirst and second positions represent the week ofmanufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-endar week. Positions three and four representthe year of manufacture. For example, a tire thatis marked "3214" wasmanufactured in week 32in 2014.


Tire characteristics

This information describes the type of tire cordand the number of layers in sidewall: andunder tire tread;.


Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of layers or the number ofrubber-coated belts in the tread and the sidewallof the tire. These are made of steel, nylon, pol-yester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)are the equivalent of 1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of theU S Department of Transportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which the vehicleis designedmultiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality of tireswith regards to tread quality, tire traction andtemperature characteristics. The quality grad-ing assessment is made by the manufacturerfollowing specifications from the U.S. govern-ment. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall ofthe tire.


Wheelsandtires

Z

Recommended tire pressuresThe recommended tire pressure applies to thetires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-mum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installed onthe vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tire ismounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. The grossaxle weight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identification.It specifies the speed range for which the tire isapproved.

GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)The GTW is the weight of a trailer including theweight of the load, luggage, accessories etc. onthe trailer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weight ofthe vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel,accessories installed, occupants, luggage andthe drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The grossvehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-cle identification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (theweight of thevehicle including all accessories, occupants,fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable). The gross vehicle weight rating isspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure isbar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacityof the tire more precisely.

Curb weightTheweight of a vehicle with standard equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-tem and optional equipment if these are instal-led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-gers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum tire load is the maximum permis-sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire isapproved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculated bydividing the maximum axle load of one axle bytwo.


PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tire widthin percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying an out-ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur-face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds persquare inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar.The tire pressure should only be corrected whenthe tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked with the tiresout of direct sunlight for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contact withthe road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sits securelyon thewheel. There are several steel wires in thebead to prevent the tire from coming loose fromthe wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-formance battery, are not included in the curbweight and the weight of the accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be used bya tire manufacturer to identify tires, for examplefor a product recall, and thus identify the pur-chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-er's identity code, tire size, tire type code andthe manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is a codethat contains the maximum load bearing capa-city of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between the tiresand the road surface.

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)The TWR specifies the maximum permissibleweight that the ball coupling of the trailer towhitch can support.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is levelwith the bars, the wear limit ofá in (1.6 mm)has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle at theirdesignated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats inthe vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireYou can find information on what to do in theevent of a flat tire in the "Breakdown assistance"section (Y page 240).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

Changing a wheel 269

Wheelsandtires

Z

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are locatedin the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be used nearthe valve. This could damage the electroniccomponents.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes under "Installing a wheel" (Y page 270).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tires inthe center.On vehicles that have the same size front andrear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer'swarranty book in your vehicle documents. If nowarranty book is available, the tires should berotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this maybe required earlier. Do not change the directionof wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and thebrake disc thoroughly every time awheel is rota-ted. Check the tire pressure and reactivate thetire pressure monitor if necessary (Y page 259).

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotation haveadditional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-planing. You will only gain these benefits if thecorrect direction of rotation is observed.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates itscorrect direction of rotation.You may mount the spare wheel against thedirection of rotation. Adhere to the time restric-tion on use as well as the speed limitation speci-fied on the spare wheel.

Storing wheelsStore tires that are not being used in a cool, dryand preferably dark place. Protect the tires fromoil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicle

G WARNINGWhen you remove the spare wheel from thespare wheel bracket, the vehicle’s weight dis-tribution changes. If the vehicle is alreadyraised, the jack could tip over. There is a riskof injury.Remove the sparewheel from the sparewheelbracket before lifting the vehicle.

X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the parking brake.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-aheadposition.

X Shift the automatic transmission to positionP.

X Switch off the engine.X Remove the vehicle tools and jack from thevehicle (Y page 120).

X Remove the sparewheel from the sparewheelbracket (Y page 239).

X Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling awayX Place chocks or other suitable items underthe front and rear of the wheel that is diago-nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.

! Only position the jack at the appropriatejacking point of the vehicle. Otherwise, youcould damage the vehicle.

270 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Observe the followingwhen raising the vehi-cle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-cific jack that has been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold thevehicle for a short time while a wheel is beingchanged. It must not be used for performingmaintenance work under the vehicle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-hill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-ing away by applying the parking brake andinserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage theparking brake while the vehicle is raised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,flat, load-bearing underlaymust be used. On aslippery surface, a non-slip underlay must beused, e.g. rubber mats.RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objectsas a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jackwill notbe able to achieve its load-bearing capacitydue to the restricted height.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground does notexceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RDo not place your hands or feet under theraised vehicle.RDo not lie under the vehicle.RDo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.RDo not open or close a door when the vehicleis raised.RMake sure that no persons are present in thevehicle when the vehicle is raised.

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts on thewheel you wish to change by about one fullturn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.

X Assemble the pump lever for the jack from thevehicle tool kit.

X Turn lowering screw= on the jack clockwiseas far as it will go using notch; on the pumplever.Pressure release screw= is closed.i Do not turn pressure release screw= bymore than one to two revolutions. Otherwise,hydraulic fluid could escape.

X Position jackA vertically under the jackingpoint of axle carrier tube?.

Changing a wheel 271

Wheelsandtires

Z

Make sure that jackA is at the correct posi-tion under axle carrier tube?. The front orrear axle must sit securely in the recess ofjackA.

X Keep pumping until axle carrier tube? sitssecurely in the recess of jackA and the baseof the jack lies evenly on the ground.Ensure that the jack is located vertically underthe jacking point.

X Raise the vehicle by pumping until the tire isno more than 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.

Removing a wheel! Do not placewheel bolts in sand or on a dirtysurface. The bolt andwheel hub threads couldotherwise be damaged when you screw themin.

When mounting/removing wheels, and for aslong as the wheels are removed, avoid applyingany external force on the brake disks. This couldimpair the level of comfort when braking.X Unscrew the wheel bolts.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts/wheel nuts anddamaged wheel bolt/wheel nut/wheel hubthreads can cause wheel bolts/wheel nuts tocome loose. As a result, you could lose awheel while driving. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Never oil or greasewheel bolts/wheel nuts. Inthe event of damage to the threads, contact aqualified specialist workshop immediately.Have the damaged wheel bolts/wheel nuts orhub threads replaced/renewed. Do not con-tinue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section(Y page 269).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use wheel bolts which have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respectivewheel.X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-faces.

X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub andpush it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Slowly open the pressure release screw onthe jack using the pump lever by approx-imately one full turn and carefully lower thevehicle (Y page 270).

X You can put the jack aside.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswisepattern in the sequence indicated (: toA).

272 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

The tightening torque must be 96 lb-ft(130 Nm).

X Dismantle the pump lever.X Push the jack piston back in and close thedrain plug.

X Use the nuts to secure the faulty wheel to thespare wheel bracket (Y page 239).

X Stow the jack and the vehicle tools in thevehicle again.

X Check the tire pressure of the newly installedwheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 254).

If you are driving with the emergency sparewheel installed, the tire pressure monitor can-not function reliably. Only restart the tire pres-suremonitor when the defectivewheel has beenreplaced with a new wheel.Allmountedwheelsmust be equippedwith func-tioning sensors for the tire pressure monitor.

Wheel and tire combinations

You can ask for information regarding permittedwheel/tire combinations at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use tires, wheels andaccessories which have been specificallyapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.These are specially adapted to the variousdriving safety systems, such as ABS or ESP®.Only use tires, wheels and accessories testedand recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Cer-tain characteristics, such as handling, vehiclenoise emissions, fuel consumption, etc. mayotherwise be adversely affected. In addition,other wheel sizes may cause the tires to rubagainst the vehicle body and axle compo-nents, when under load. This may result indamage to the tire or to the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz is not responsible for anydamage caused by using tires, wheels oraccessories different from those recommen-ded.Information on tires, wheels and permissiblecombinations can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-

ous damage cannot always be detected onretreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benzcannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreadedtires are mounted. Do not mount used tires ifyou have no information about their previoususage.

The recommended pressures for various oper-ating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flapObserve the notes on recommended tire pres-sures under various operating conditions(Y page 254).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the maintenancerecommendations of the tire manufacturer inthe vehicle document wallet.Notes on equipping the vehicle:Ralways install tires of the same size on oneaxle (left/right)Ralways install the same type of tires on yourvehicle (summer tires, winter tires, all-weather tires, all-terrain tires)

Wheel and tire combinations 273

Wheelsandtires

Z

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers to avehicle with standard equipment. Consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thedata for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

Vehicle electronics

Installing two-way radios and mobilephones (RF transmitters)

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from modifiedor incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters caninterfere with the vehicle electronics. This cancompromise the operational safety of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.You should have all work to electrical andelectronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe electromagnetic radiation from incor-rectly operated RF transmitters can interferewith the vehicle electronics, for example:Rif the RF transmitter is not connected withan exterior antennaRthe exterior antenna has been installedincorrectly or is not a low-reflection type

This can compromise the operational safetyof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Have the low-reflection exterior antennamounted at a qualified specialist workshop.When operating RF transmitters in the vehi-cle, always connect them with the low-reflec-tion exterior antenna.

! The operating permit may be invalidated ifthe instructions for installation and use of RFtransmitters are not observed.

In particular, the following conditionsmust becomplied with:Ronly approved wavebands may be used.Robserve the maximum permissible outputin these wavebands.Ronly approved antenna positions may beused.

Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiationmay cause damage to your health and the healthof others. Using an exterior antenna takes intoaccount current scientific discussions relatingto the possible health hazards that may resultfrom electromagnetic fields.

Approved antenna positions: Front roof area; Rear fenderWhen installing an antenna on the front roofarea of vehicles with a sliding sunroof, observethe sweeping range of the roof.On the rear fenders, it is recommended to posi-tion the antenna on the side of the vehicle clos-est to the center of the road.Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609when retrofitting RF transmitters (RoadVehicles- EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarketradio frequency transmitting equipment).Observe the legal requirements for accessoryparts.If your vehicle has installations for two-way radioequipment, use the power supply or antennaconnections intended for use with the basic wir-ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's Sup-plement when installing.Deviations with respect to frequency bands,maximum transmission outputs or antennapositions must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.

274 Vehicle electronicsTechnicaldata

Themaximum transmission output (PEAK) at thebase of the antenna must not exceed the fol-lowing values:

Frequency band Maximumtransmission

output

Short wave3 - 54 MHz

100 W

4 m waveband68 - 87.5 MHz

30 W

2 m waveband144 - 174 MHz

50 W

Trunked radio system/Tetra380 - 460 MHz

10 W

70 cm waveband400 - 460 MHz

35 W

Mobile communications(2G/3G/4G)

10 W

The following can be used in the vehicle withoutrestrictions:RRF transmitters with a maximum transmis-sion output of up to 100 mWRRF transmitters with transmitter frequenciesin the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi-mum transmission output of up to 2 W(trunked radio/Tetra)RMobile phones (2G/3G/4G)There is no restriction for antenna positions onthe outside of the vehicle for the following fre-quency bands:RTrunked radio system/TetraR70 cm wavebandR2G/3G/4G

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN)

X Open the front left-hand door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Paint code

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicle identificationplate is used only as an example. This data isdifferent for every vehicle and can deviate

Identification plates 275

Technicaldata

Z

from the data shown here. The correct datafor your vehicle can be found on the vehicleidentification plate that is mounted on yourvehicle.

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

: VIN (stamped into the chassis on the right-hand side, when viewed in the direction oftravel)

The VIN can also be found on the vehicle iden-tification plate (Y page 275).The VIN can also be found at the lower edge ofthe windshield (Y page 276).

Engine number

Example: engine compartment: Emissions control information plate, includ-

ing the certification of both federal and Cali-fornian emissions standards

; Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)

Service products and filling capaci-ties


G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must match.Only use products recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused by the use ofproducts which have not been recommended isnot covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty orgoodwill gestures. Products approved byMercedes-Benz are listed in this Operator'sManual in the appropriate section.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at a Mercedes-Benz ServiceCenter or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approved byMercedes-Benz by the following inscription onthe containers:RMB-Freigabe (e. g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e. g. MB Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g. MB229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

276 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Other identifications, for example:R0 W-30R5 W-30R5 W-40

Fuel


G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacityMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Total capa-city

Mercedes-AMG G 65

All other models 25.4 US gal(96.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

Mercedes-AMG G 65

All other models Approx.3.7 US gal(14.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Only refuel using unleaded premium gradegasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.

i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You canrefuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.

! Only use the fuel recommended. Operatingthe vehicle with other fuels can lead to dam-age to the fuel system, engine and exhaustsystem.

! Do not use the following:RGasoline with more than 10% ethanolRE100 (100% ethanol)RGasoline with methanolRM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDiesel

Service products and filling capacities 277

Technicaldata

Z

Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle.

! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailableand you have to refuel with unleaded gasolineof a lower grade, observe the following pre-cautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regularunleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre-mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon aspossible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.

You will usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find the labelon the pump, ask the staff for assistance.

i For further information, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

As a temporary measure, if the recommendedfuel is not available, you may also use regularunleaded gasoline with an octane rating of87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoiddriving at full throttle and sudden acceleration.Never refuel using gasoline with a lower AKI.Information on refueling (Y page 118).

Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Do notmix fuel additives with fuel. This does notinclude additives for the removal and preven-tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only bemixed with additives recommended byMercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructionsfor use on the product label.More informationabout recommended additives can beobtained from any authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran-ded fuels that have additives.The fuel quality available in some countries maynot be sufficient. Residue could build up in thefuel injection system as a result. In such cases,and in consultation with an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixedwith the cleaning additive recommended by

Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notesand mixing ratios specified on the container.

Engine oil

General notes

! Do not use engine oil or an oil filter withspecifications deviating from those expresslyrequired for the prescribed service intervals.Do not change the engine oil or oil filter inorder to set replacement intervals longer thanthose prescribed. This could otherwise causedamage to the engine or exhaust gas after-treatment.Follow the instructions on the service intervaldisplay for changing the engine oil. This couldotherwise cause damage to the engine orexhaust gas aftertreatment.

When handling engine oil, observe the importantsafety notes on service products (Y page 276).The engine oils are matched to the performanceofMercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.For this reason, only use engine oils and oil fil-ters that are approved for vehicles with a servicesystem.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center orgo to the Internet sitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com (USA only).The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Model MB-Freigabe orMB-Approval

All models 229.5

i The MB-Freigabe or MB Approval is statedon the oil containers.


Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

G 550 2.4 US gal (9.0 l)

Mercedes-AMG G 63 2.25 US gal(8.5 l)

Mercedes-AMG G 65 2.77 US gal(10.5 l)

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

When handling brake fluid, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 276).Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid can beobtained at any qualified specialist workshop oron the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop in accordancewith the replacement intervals and thereplacement confirmed in the service report.

Coolant


G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can be foundin the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on theInternet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, evenin countries where high temperatures prevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and the replace-ment confirmed in the service report.

Comply with the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 276).The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the fol-lowing tasks:RAnti-corrosion protectionRAntifreeze protectionRRaising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection down to-35 ‡ (-37†), the boiling point of the coolant inthe pressurized system is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).

Service products and filling capacities 279

Technicaldata

Z

The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-tion in the engine cooling system should:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection downto -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not bedissipated as effectively.

Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor in accordance with MB Spec-ifications for Service Products 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filledwith a coolant mixture that ensures adequateantifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.

i The coolant is checked at specified intervalsat a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cooling system is filled with coolantat the factory which contains antifreeze/corro-sion inhibitor that ensures protection down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).

CapacityMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Capacity

G 550 Approx. 11.1 US qt(10.5 l)

G 63 AMG Approx. 14.6 US qt(13.8 l)

G 65 AMG

Windshield/headlamp cleaning sys-tem


G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

Do not use distilled or de-ionized water. Other-wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 276).At temperatures above freezing:X Fill thewasher fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill thewasher fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-mation on the antifreeze reservoir.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid allyear round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle is fil-led with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oilapproved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.The approved PAG oil may not be mixed withany other PAG oil that is not approved forR-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climatecontrol system may be damaged.

Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant orreplacing component parts, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. All appli-cable regulations must be adhered to, SAEstandard J639 included.Always have work on the climate control systemcarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.


Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerantWarning symbol: advises you about:RPossible dangersRHaving service work carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop

Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Refrigerant

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

All other models

Model PAG oil

Mercedes-AMG vehicles

All models

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicle data:Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:

- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRthe vehicle length specified includes the frontlicense plate adapter.

Dimensions and weights

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

G 550

: Distance to topedge

75 in - 78.9 in(1905 mm -2005 mm)

; Distance to loweredge

26.8 in - 30.7 in(680 mm -780 mm)

=Range ofmovement 36.7 in (931 mm)

Vehicle data 281

Technicaldata

Z

Mercedes-AMGG 63 AMG

: Upper-edge clear-ance

74.5 in - 78.4 in(1892 mm -1992 mm)

; Lower-edge clear-ance

26.3 in - 30.2 in(667 mm -767 mm)

=Range ofmovement 36.7 in (931 mm)

Mercedes-AMGG 65 AMG

: Distance to topedge

; Distance to loweredge

=Range ofmovement

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

G 550

Vehicle length 187.6 in(4764 mm)

Vehicle width includingexterior mirrors

80.9 in(2056 mm)

Vehicle height 76.9 in(1954 mm)

Wheelbase 112.2 in(2850 mm)

Minimum ground clear-ance

7.6 in(193 mm)

Turning radius 44.6 ft(13.60 m)

Gross vehicle weight rat-ing (GVWR)

7054.8 lb(3200 kg)

Gross axle weight rating(GAWR), front

3417.1 lb(1550 kg)

Gross axle weight rating(GAWR), rear

4188.7 lb(1900 kg)

Mercedes-AMG G 63

Vehicle length 187.8 in(4769 mm)


80.9 in(2056 mm)

Vehicle height 76.3 in(1938 mm)

Wheelbase 112.2 in(2850 mm)


7.7 in(196 mm)

Turning radius 44.6 ft(13.60 m)


7054.8 lb(3200 kg)


3417.1 lb(1550 kg)


4122.6 lb(1870 kg)

Mercedes-AMG G 65

Vehicle length


Vehicle height

Wheelbase


Turning radius




i Gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicleweight including fuel, service products, sparewheel, accessories installed, load and, ifapplicable, trailer drawbar load. The GVWmust never exceed the GVWR.

282 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

i The GAWR is the maximum permissible axleweight.

Vehicle data for off-road driving

Fording depth! The depth of water must not exceed thevalue specified in the table. Note that thepossible fording depth is less in flowingwater.

The table shows fording depth: when loadedand ready to drive.Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Fording depth

Mercedes-AMGG 65

All models 23.6 in (60 cm)

Formore information about off-road fording, see(Y page 126).

Approach/departure angle


For vehicleswith steel springs, loaded and readyto drive means: a full tank, all fluids refilled andthe driver is in the vehicle.Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

: ;

Mercedes-AMG G 63

27° 27°

Mercedes-AMG G 65

All othermodels

30° 30°

For further information about approach/depar-ture angles, see (Y page 130).

Maximum gradient-climbing capabil-ityNote that the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa-bility depends on the off-road conditions and theroad surface conditions.On good road surfaces the maximum gradient-climbing capability of your vehicle is 100%,which corresponds to an approach/departureangle of 45°.Accelerate carefully and make sure that thewheels do not spin when driving on steep ter-rain.

i If the load on the front axle is reduced whenpulling away on a steep uphill slope, the frontwheels have a tendency to spin. 4ETS detectsthis and brakes the wheels accordingly. Therear wheel torque is increased, making it eas-ier to drive off.

Vehicle data for off-road driving 283

Technicaldata

Z

For further information about the maximum gra-dient climbing ability, see (Y page 130).

Trailer tow hitch

Permissible trailer load, braked (at aminimum gradient-climbing capabil-ity of 12% from a standstill)Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model

Mercedes-AMGG 65

All other models 7716 lb (3500 kg)

Maximum drawbar noseweight! Use a drawbar noseweight as close as pos-sible to the maximum permissible nose-weight. Do not use a noseweight of less than50 kg, otherwise the trailer may come loose.Note that the payload and the rear axle loadare reduced by the actual payload.

The drawbar load reduces the permissible over-all load and rear axle load.The drawbar load acts from above onto the ballhead on the trailer tow hitch.The trailer drawbar noseweight is not included inthe towing weight.Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Permissible nose-weight

Mercedes-AMGG 65

All other models 308.6 lb (140 kg)

The actual noseweight may not be higher thanthe value which is given. The value can be foundon the trailer tow hitch or trailer identificationplates. The lowest weight applies.The maximum permissible trailer drawbar nose-weight is the maximum weight with which thetrailer drawbar can be loaded. The permissible

trailer drawbar noseweight is the limit forMercedes-Benz-approved trailer couplings.

Ball position

Ball position of the ball couplingWhen choosing a ball coupling, the dimensionsstated in the illustration must not be exceeded.

Gross rear axle weight rating whentowing a trailerMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Gross axle weightrating

Mercedes-AMGG 65

All other models 308.6 lb (1900 kg)

284 Trailer tow hitchTechnicaldata

g-class - mercedes-benz usawelcometotheworldofmercedes-benz weurgeyoutoreadthisoperator'smanual...

Documents